JP7220920B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In a conventional gaming machine, based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the starting condition, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and a gaming machine that executes a variable effect according to the result of the determination. is common.

In such a gaming machine, the interest in the game is heightened by performing various effects in the variable effects (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-033816 A

However, in the gaming machine as described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the variable presentation, and there is a problem that the game lacks interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the effect button 17, the cross key 19) that the player can operate and , first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port); A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on establishment (winning of the game ball to the second start port), a normal game state, and a normal game state A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player, and a first variable effect is executed according to the determination result of the first determination means. , and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a second variation production according to the determination result of the second determination means, and the operation means includes a first operation means (cross key 19) and the A second operation means (production button 17) different from the first operation means is included, and the production control means controls production elements (production mode, BGM, volume, amount of light, etc.) can be changed to any one of a plurality of effect elements, and during execution of the second variable effect in the specific game state, the effect element used for the first variable effect can be changed. a first vibration effect (vibration effect during step-up notice effect, confirmation Vibration performance during performance, etc.) can be executed, and the second operating means is operated in a predetermined manner in response to the operation of the second operating means during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the first variable performance. It is possible to execute a second vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of deciding effect, etc.) to vibrate, and a win-lose effect (determining effect) that suggests whether or not the special game is executed during the execution of the first variable effect. It is executable, and the first vibration performance is executed in the case where the first variation performance is executed during the normal game state and the case where the first fluctuation performance is executed during the specific game state. The easiness is different, the effective period related to the second vibration effect is generated when the win-lose effect is executed, and the second vibration effect associated with the win-lose effect is longer than the vibration period in the first vibration effect. is characterized in that the vibration period in is set to be longer.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a rear view which shows the state which assembled|attached each unit to the base frame. FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 2; It is a figure which shows the main board case of this embodiment at the time of accommodating a main control board. It is an exploded perspective view including a base of a main board case. It is a back perspective view of a main board case. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a main-control board. It is a front view of a main board case when a main control board is accommodated. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special design determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a prior determination table. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting production|presentation processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system production|presentation process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for pending icons; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a 1-step change pattern determination table for the icon, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a 2-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows the continuous announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement type determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for production modes D to G (specific game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement effect scenario determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement effect scenario determination table for effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the continuation notice production|presentation execution process in an production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the lamp change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a variable effect pattern determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variable production pattern determination table for production modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the timer production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an event timer count determination table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestive event determination table for one-time timer; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a first suggested event determination table for two timers, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a second suggested event determination table for two timers. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an update pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a pre-reach advance notice determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a pre-reach advance notice determination table for production modes D to G (specific game state). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a dialog announcement pattern determination table; It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a development effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a roulette advance notice determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a roulette notice stop option determination table; It is a diagram showing an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table for effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows an example of a decided effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a re-lottery effect pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a fixed effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of operating an operation part during a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart when a variable effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variable production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the variable effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation which increases immediately after the number of reservations decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during specific reach production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the specific reach effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example when the player changes the effect element during the first variable effect in the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example when the player changes the effect element during the second variable effect in the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case the look-ahead operation|movement production|presentation and step-up notice production|presentation are performed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example when the look-ahead action effect and the step-up notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case the look-ahead vibration production|presentation and the dialogue announcement production|presentation are performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example in the case where the anticipatory vibration effect and the speech announcement effect are executed; It is a timing chart when the timer effect is executed during the variable effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation which timer production|presentation is performed during fluctuation|variation production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a roulette notice and a pseudo-continuous presentation are executed before a ready-to-win presentation; It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case pseudo-continuous production is performed after a ready-to-win production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a development production|presentation is performed and SP ready-to-win production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case an expansion production|presentation is performed and a SPSP ready-to-win production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a cut-in production|presentation is performed during SP ready-to-win production|presentation and it becomes a big hit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect when a cut-in effect is executed during the SP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect example 1 in a case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the production example 1 in the case where the determined production is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win production and the jackpot is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect example 2 in the case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example 2 in the case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case special SP ready-to-win production|presentation is performed in production|presentation mode A (normal game state) and it becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case special SP ready-to-win production is performed in production|presentation mode G (specific game state) and it becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case variable probability mission production|presentation is performed during a big hit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decided effect pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 has a mounting part (not shown) for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism part 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction. , and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 so as to cover the front of the mounting part of the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, It is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the mounting part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4 are a sound output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and game balls paid out from a payout device 100 described later. an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not entered the upper tray 11 and flowed into an overflowing ball flow path described later, and a game ball shooting operation. A firing operation device 13 is provided for performing the firing operation.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations in the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval therebetween, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, voice). It has become. A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality (to be described later) occurs.

The upper plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a which is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various productions described later. They are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 9) for detecting an operation on the production button 17, and a production button. A button drive device 17b (see FIG. 9) is provided for driving the game machine 17 so that the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1. FIG.

The effect button 17 emits effect light by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white, red, rainbow colors). It is possible. In addition, by the driving force of the button driving motor, which is a part of the button driving device 17b, it is possible to move vertically between the standby position (origin position) positioned below and the production position positioned above. A button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position. Furthermore, the driving force of the button vibration motor, which is a part of the button driving device 17b, vibrates in a predetermined vibration mode, thereby making it possible to perform an effect operation. A button 17 can be operated.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can be operated such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a ( 9) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium received by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in the gaming machine 1 is subtracted, and the game balls are lent out. When the return button of the operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 9) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path. is detected, the payout of game balls by the payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 9), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 9) made up of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a plurality of light emitting devices for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A handle LED (frame illumination device 10) is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25 , and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 are connected to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

The shooting device 26 includes a hitting member 28 for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 9) for driving the hitting member 28, and an upward movement from the hitting member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. An inclined shooting rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at the shooting position which is the inclined lower end of the shooting rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member 28. - 特許庁

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of game balls into the inside, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decoration frame 40. - 特許庁A warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce game balls flowing down the game area 5 a into the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling a game ball introduced into the interior of the frame 40 and causing it to flow downward.

In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning openings 43 in which game balls can always win (entering a ball) are provided at intervals. When the winning (entering) game ball is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number (for example 10) of game balls are released from the payout device 100 (not shown) as prize balls. Dispensed onto a plate 11.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a general pattern gate 44 (normal pattern start area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball that has passed through this general pattern gate 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 9), a winning lottery (assisting game determination) of normal symbols is performed. It should be noted that the winning lottery of normal symbols will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a and directly under the stage portion 42, there is provided a first start port 45 (special figure start region) in which the game ball can always win a prize (enter a ball), and this first start port 45 When a winning (entering) game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are delivered from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. It is supposed to be paid out. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, a game ball is opened from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a winning lottery with a normal symbol is won). A variable starting portion 46 is provided which is converted to an open state (special mode) that allows or facilitates winning (entering a ball).

The variable starting unit 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting region) in which a game ball can win (entering a ball), and a second A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 9), a movable member 48 that changes (variable) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid for opening and closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 9) are provided. And, when the second starting port 47 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is open, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easier.

In addition, when the game ball that has entered the second start hole 47 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the payout device 100 as prize balls. It is to be paid out on 11th. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46, there is provided a prize winning port lamp NR (not shown) for causing the periphery of the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform lighting effects by emitting light from a board lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-hand normal figure gate 44, a closed state in which a game ball cannot win (enter a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the special symbol jackpot determination) A variable winning portion 49 is provided which is converted from (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can win (enter a ball).

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can win (enter a ball), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (FIG. 9), an opening/closing member 51 that converts (variable) the large winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51 are provided. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the winning of the game ball (ball ) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are sent from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. be paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A game ball detected by the second starting hole detection switch 47a and the big winning hole detection switch 50a, and a game ball that has flowed into the out hole 39 are received and gathered while flowing down. An out ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream portion of the ball flow path. A game ball flowing down this out ball flow path and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from a discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1. - 特許庁

Outside the game area 5a, there are a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63, a second special symbol reservation display device 64, as well as. Ordinary symbol holding display 65, round number display 66 (see FIG. 9) for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) to be described later is executed, jackpot game (special game) or time saving game state Inside, there is a right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 9) for prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a, and a state confirmation display indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. A main information display 59 is provided comprising a device 68 (see FIG. 9).

Also, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). The probability of winning a jackpot (1/285 to 1/300) and set values (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed on the winning probability display sticker. It should be noted that the sticking position of the winning probability display sticker is an example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the second starting port 47. It is a variable display device, and the normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The first special symbol jackpot determination is obtained by acquiring a jackpot determination random number (first special figure determination information) when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45, and for the acquired jackpot determination. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing the random value and the jackpot determination value. In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot determination is performed, the first special symbol display device 60 performs the variable display of the first special symbol, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. will be That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

The second special symbol jackpot determination is obtained by acquiring a jackpot determination random value (second special figure determination information) when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47, and for the acquired jackpot determination. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing the random value and the jackpot determination value. In addition, when the second special symbol jackpot determination is performed, the second special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. will be That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big hit mode, losing mode) indicating the result of each big hit determination.

It should be noted that the "jackpot" in the present embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot determination (special game determination), or the second special symbol jackpot determination (special game determination), run the jackpot game (special game) It refers to the state in which you have acquired the right to The "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning port 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9) wins (enters a ball), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous to the player who can easily win prize balls. In this embodiment, it is possible to generate any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage for the player, which will be described later in detail.

The winning lottery of the normal pattern is obtained by acquiring a random number value for hitting judgment when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, and comparing the obtained random number value for judgment with the hit judgment value to see if it is a "win". It corresponds to determining whether or not When the winning lottery for the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the lottery. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

Incidentally, the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is obtained in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 even before reaching the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) win a prize (entering a ball), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. In other words, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition of the variable display is likely to be established). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

The first special symbol holding display device 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the first special symbol jackpot judgment (first special symbol) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45 It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Although the maximum number of first reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the second special symbol jackpot determination (second special symbol) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47 It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved memory) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved memories. Although the maximum number of second reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display device 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the right for performing a normal symbol winning lottery (normal symbol fluctuation display) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes) the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (normal pattern reserved memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of normal pattern reserved memory. In addition, although the general pattern reservation memory is designed to be stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than or more than four.

Note that the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, when winning the jackpot judgment of the special symbol, "7" is stopped and displayed, and when it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the variable display of special symbols, the result of stopping the previous variable display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the variable display starts, the LED is turned off. It becomes easy to grasp that it has been started.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left lights up, and if the jackpot game has 16 rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state, the right-handed player urges to shoot the game ball toward the right gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting). It is for displaying a beating display, and the LED lights up during a big win state (special game state) and a time saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. , the LED starts lighting, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the state confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (surface) of the gaming machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily check whether it is set to

It should be noted that the installation position of the state confirmation display 68 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1 .

In the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. You can For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed. When the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 and any one of the second game information display devices 69 are illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status Only the confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are turned off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

In the lower right part inside the game area 5a, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 , a sub-normal figure holding display 86, and a sub-right-handed display 87 that prompts to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed). The sub-information display device 80 is not provided with an indicator such as the status confirmation indicator 68 described above, which indicates that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination, and the second sub-variation display 82 displays the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination. They are for (notifying), and are each composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special pattern is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp pattern LZ or the second lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner), and when the corresponding special pattern is stopped and displayed, a big win. The result of the judgment (lights up in the case of a big hit, lights out in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82, it blinks and stops while the special symbols are being varied, so that only whether or not the special symbols are being varied is displayed. It may be turned on or off when displayed.

The first sub-reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories (number of reservations), and the second sub-reservation display 84 displays the number of second reservation memories (number of reservations). , each of which is composed of two left and right LEDs. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, and when the number of reservations is "2" The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks and the right LED blinks when the number of reservations is "3", and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of reservations is "4".

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning, light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed fluctuating can be grasped, it blinks during the normal pattern fluctuation display, and when it is stopped, it lights up or turns off. may

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation storage (number of reservations), and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. Then, the left and right LEDs are turned off when the number of normal figure reservations is "0", and when the number of normal figure reservations is "1", the LED on the left side lights up and the LED on the right side goes out, and the number of normal figure reservations is When the number is "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made up of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the production space 40a, and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in the lower part of the production space 40a. , a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided. is provided, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the production space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) performs various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the effect pattern executed during the variable display of the special symbol There is a variable production with a variable display of 70a.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area. The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed by scrolling the production pattern 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment). In addition, a special symbol display area is formed in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area is changed to a variable display of the special symbol. Correspondingly, by scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed.

In addition, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are, for example, constituted by patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61 The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed in correspondence with (synchronization with) the variable display of the symbols. That is, the variable display of the production design 70a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special design, the performance design 70a is temporarily stopped (swing display) before the stop of the variable display of the special design, and the special design is changed. In response to the stop display of the display, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is stopped (still displayed). Incidentally, as the production pattern 70a, in addition to the patterns showing numbers, patterns showing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

Note that the "temporary stop display" means that the performance symbol 70a shakes slightly or deforms slightly to give the player the impression that the performance symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a stops for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the big hit determination. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same production pattern such as "777" or a combination of production patterns with regularity such as "357", and the losing mode is other aspects. be. In addition, the form of the variable display of the production pattern 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be rotated (rotated) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, depending on the result of the big hit determination, various effect images such as a reach effect, a background image, and characters, movies, etc., which will be described later, are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the like. Displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) so as to increase the player's expectation for the execution of the big win (special game) (hereinafter referred to as "expectation for winning the big win"). It's becoming

In addition, at the bottom of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), in the normal game state (basically excluding the specific game state), the number of the current first reserve storage 1st special figure reserve A first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the number (U1), and the current number of second reserved memories in the specific game state (basically excluding the normal game state) A second reserved icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special figure reserved number (U2), and a special pattern (effect pattern An icon display area 70C is formed for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of 70a).

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first special figure pending number (U1).

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 displays the first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70B2 displays 2 The first reserved icon H12 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is displayed in the third display section 70B3, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the third display. A first reserved icon H13 indicating the first reserved memory is displayed, and a first reserved icon H14 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display portion 70B4. In the normal game state, every time the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first reserved icon displayed on each display unit is shifted (reduced) to the icon display area 70C. It's becoming

In the first reserved icon display area 70B configured in this way, since the first reserved icon is displayed in the normal game state, the number of the first reserved icon corresponding to the increase or decrease of the first special figure reserved number (U1) The number also increases or decreases (increase display or shift display (decrease display) of the first reserved icon is performed), but since the first reserved icon is not displayed in the specific game state, the first special figure reserved number (U1) increases or decreases , the number of the first pending icons does not increase or decrease (increase display or shift display (decrease display) of the first pending icons is not performed).

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display the number of second pending icons corresponding to the number of second special figure pending (U2). That is, the number of second reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the second special figure reservation number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays the second pending icon H21 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays two The second holding icon H22 indicating the second holding memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third in the third display section 70D3. A second suspended icon H23 indicating a second suspended memory is displayed, and a second suspended icon H24 indicating a second suspended memory in which the fourth display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display portion 70D4. Then, every time the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the specific game state, the second reserved icon displayed on each display unit is shifted (reduced) to the icon display area 70C. It's becoming

In the second reserved icon display area 70D configured in this way, since the second reserved icon is displayed in the specific gaming state, the second reserved icon corresponding to the increase or decrease of the second special figure reserved number (U2) The number also increases or decreases (increase display or shift display (decrease display) of the second reserved icon is performed), but since the second reserved icon is not displayed in the normal game state, the second special figure reserved number (U2) increases or decreases , the number of second pending icons does not increase or decrease (increase display or shift display (decrease display) of the second pending icons is not performed).

In addition, if the second special figure pending number (U2) is "1" or more when the specific game state (here, the time saving game state) ends and the normal game state is entered, this second special figure pending number ( U2) becomes "0" until the second pending icon is exceptionally displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D. The number of pending icons is also increased or decreased (the second pending icon is increased or shifted (decreased) is displayed). The shift display of the pending icon may not be performed).

The icon display area 70C is displayed on the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B corresponding to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) in the normal game state (excluding the specific game state). In response to the start of the variable display of the displayed first pending icon or the second special symbol (production symbol 70a) in the specific gaming state (excluding the normal gaming state), the first of the second pending icon display area 70D When the second pending icon displayed on the display unit 70D1 moves (shifts), the icon TI is displayed, and the icon TI disappears (erases) at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). do. In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special figure reservation number" may be referred to as the "first reservation number" and the "second special figure reservation number" may be referred to as the "second reservation number". Also, the "first reserved icon", the "second reserved icon", and the "relevant icon" may be collectively referred to as "icons".

Also, on the left side of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first reserved number indicating the number of the current first special figure reserved number (U1) is displayed in the normal game state and the specific game state. For the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation for displaying the second reservation number indicating the number of the current second special figure reservation number (U2) in the normal game state and the specific game state A number display area 70F is formed.

Therefore, the reserved display indicating the first special figure reserved number is performed in the first reserved icon display area 70B and the first special figure reserved number display area 70E in the normal game state, and the first special figure reserved number in the specific game state This is done in the display area 70E. In addition, the reserved display indicating the second special figure reserved number is performed in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F in the normal game state, and the second reserved icon display area 70D and the second special figure reserved number in the specific game state This is done in the display area 70F.

The first movable member 73 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode. It is moved vertically between a standby position (origin position) located above and a production position located below by the driving force of the first movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 9). It is possible to perform a performance action by moving to , and the fact that it is at the origin position is detected by a first position detection sensor (not shown).

The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode. By the driving force of the second movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 9), the position between the standby position (origin position) located on the upper right and the effect position located on the lower left It is possible to perform a performance action by moving diagonally up and down, and a second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the rendering positions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate simultaneously. By not doing so, they do not conflict with each other.

In addition, if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, after one movable member moves to the rendering position, it returns to a position that does not overlap with the rendering position of the other movable member. The other movable member may be moved to the performance position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), a game supplied from an island facility, etc. A game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110 A payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110. A performance control device 130A (not shown) incorporating a control board 130, a power supply device 160A (not shown) containing a power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices, and game information (not shown) outside the game machine A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 9) for outputting game signals is provided.

In addition, an opening and closing door type cover member is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left and right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire production control device 130A from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of the production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member, the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and various lighting A changeover switch 22 (see FIG. 9) is provided for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76).

On the surface side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a stage of clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or the degree of advantage of the game (game RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, and a signal for shifting to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting key. A setting key switch 112a for inputting , an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values, etc., which enables the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and is composed of four 7-segment displays each having a decimal point DP arranged side by side. there is An identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured on two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information is configured by .

(Structure of the back of the game board)
Next, the configuration of the back side of the game board will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG.
FIG. 2 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame, and FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, etc., a base frame 170 (liquid crystal base frame) having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is assembled to the back surface (rear surface) of the game board 5. The base frame 170 An image display unit (first image display device 70 and image display cover 185) 180 is assembled on the back side (rear side) of the so as to close the opening. A lamp relay board 186 is assembled to the rear surface (rear surface) of the image display cover 185 (liquid crystal cover). A main board case 200 containing 110 is attached.

The base frame 170 (liquid crystal base) is a substantially square annular body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and its annular front surface 171 is attached and fixed to the back surface of the game board 5 . A space for arranging various circuit boards and parts is provided on the back surface of the base frame 170 .
An effect control board 130 is arranged on the back side of the image display unit 180 (liquid crystal unit) fixed to the back of the base frame 170 . The image display unit 180 is slidable from the side (horizontal direction) of the base frame body, the vertical direction, or the oblique direction in the gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the performance control board. It is configured so that it can be attached to
Various circuit boards arranged on the back surface of the base frame are covered with a lid member 190 .

As shown in FIG. 2, on the rear side of the main board case 200, at least the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a provided on the main control board 110 are exposed.
Also, the information display 113 provided on the main control board 110 can be visually recognized through the transparent main board case 200 .
The staff of the game parlor opens the door of the game machine, operates the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a while viewing the information display device 113 on the back of the game machine, and clears the RWM, changes the settings, and confirms the settings. You can perform operations such as checking the performance information of the game machine.

The RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed, and an operation member 685 that can be operated by the staff of the amusement arcade through an opening provided in the main board case 200 at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. stands out.
When a staff or the like presses the operating member 685, the pressed operating member 685 presses the RWM clear switch 111a. As a result, the RWM clear switch 111a is operated.

The setting key switch 112a is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end face of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
An end face of the setting key switch 112a having a keyhole is exposed through an opening provided in the main board case 200. As shown in FIG.
Amusement arcade staff or the like can operate the setting key switch 112a by inserting a key into the keyhole.

(main board case)
Next, the configuration of the main board case 200 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG.
In the present embodiment, the game board 5 side is defined as the front side, and the direction opposite to the game board 5 is defined as the rear side with respect to the main board case 200 . Therefore, the left-right direction in the drawing is the left-right direction when the main board case 200 is viewed from the side opposite to the game board 5 .

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a main board case according to an example of the present embodiment, FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view including a pedestal of the main board case 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded view of the main board case 200. It is a rear perspective view of when.
The main board case 200 of the present embodiment is attached to the back of a game machine such as a pachinko game machine via a pedestal 280 while housing the main control board 110 on which electronic components are mounted.

The pedestal 280 is connecting means for attaching the main board case 200 to the game machine side holding portion (the lamp relay board 186 in this embodiment) provided on the back side of the game machine main body.
The main board case 200 housing the main control board is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back of the game board such as a pachinko game machine via the pedestal 280. Electronic components mounted on the main control board 110 inside can be viewed through the case piece 220 .

The pedestal 280 is a component used to attach the main board case 200 to the rear side of the game board 5 . As shown in FIG. 5, the pedestal 280 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the horizontal direction are longer than two sides along the vertical direction. , and a plate shape is provided in the center of the upper side in the left-right direction. The axial direction of the shaft portion 281 coincides with the horizontal direction.

The main board case 200 is provided with a pair of hook portions 249 that are engaged with the respective shaft portions 281 . A pair of hook portions 249 are provided on the lower side of an upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hook portion 249 is formed in a U shape that protrudes toward the front side.

When attaching the main board case 200 to the pedestal 280, the main board case 200 is arranged so that the hook portion 249 protrudes toward the back side. Then, the hook portions 249 are brought into a state in which they can be engaged with the shaft portions 281 , so that the main circuit board case 200 is brought closer to the pedestal 280 to engage the hook portions 249 with the shaft portions 281 .

After the hook portion 249 is engaged with the shaft portion 281 , the free end side of the main circuit board case 200 is rotated upward about the shaft portion 281 to overlap the main circuit board case 200 with the base 280 . At this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper side of the base 280 is hooked on the recess D provided on the upper side of the main board case 200 . Therefore, the main board case 200 is fixed to the pedestal 280 by the engagement between the hook portion 249 and the shaft portion 281 and the engagement between the plate-like hook 282 and the main board case 200 .

After that, the protective cover 229 is attached to the main board case 200 . Protective cover 229 covers the lower portion of main board case 200 including hook portion 249 . In this manner, the main controller 110A is attached to the rear side of the game board 5. FIG.

The main board case 200 consists of two case pieces (lower case piece) made of transparent resin that accommodate a main control board 110 (printed circuit board) of a single-sided mounting system in which electronic components are arranged only on one side. 210, upper case piece 220), a cutting member 230 for cutting an unsealable seal sandwiched and held between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, and an unsealable seal 250 to be described later. and a cap 240 detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 of the substrate case 200 .

The main board case 200 encloses the main control board 110 with the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 mounted on the main control board 110 exposed. The main circuit board case 200 is made of a material having optical transparency, such as transparent plastic.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 constitute a main substrate case main body (sealing body 300).
A protective cover 229 is arranged below the upper case piece 220 to cover the connecting portion between the internal connector provided on the internal main control board 110 and the external connector.
In this embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 with the main control board 110 interposed therebetween by a crimping member.

A crimping fastening portion 291 using a crimping member is arranged at an appropriate position along the edge of the main substrate case 200 , and a crimping member (locking member ), the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are locked in the closed state. The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 become openable and detachable by removing (breaking) the crimping member driven into (locked) the crimping fastening hole.

In the crimping fastening portion 291 of the main board case 200 of this embodiment, two crimping fastening holes are provided (crimping fastening holes 291A and 291B).
The respective caulking fastening holes 291A and 291B are formed by connecting a lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and an upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220 to each other.

Only one caulking fastening hole is used for fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 once. After removing (breaking) the crimping member and releasing the fastening (after opening the main board case 200), when fastening is performed again, the fastening is performed by driving the crimping member into the other remaining crimping fastening hole. conduct. That is, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to twice.

The lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form an enclosing part 581 for enclosing the main control board 110 . The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side of the main substrate case 200, which is the side of the main controller 110m. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side of the main substrate case 200, which is the side opposite to the main control unit 110m side.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are respectively provided with control board storage sections 211 and 221 that store the main control board 110 and sealing sections 212 and 222 that constitute a sealing base section 310 to be described later. there is The control board housing portions 211 and 221 are provided with substantially rectangular plate portions 211a and 221a, respectively, and projecting from the peripheral edge portions of the plate portions 211a and 221a. It is formed in a shape having flange portions 211b and 221b surrounding the surface.

A cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward on the main control board 110 side is provided on the left portion of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210 . A hole portion 566 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the cylindrical portion 565 . A thread is formed inside the hole 566 . A hole portion 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565 in the main control board 110 .

The main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210 . More specifically, behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the lower case piece 210, the hole portion 567 of the main control board 110 is arranged. A screw shaft for fixing the main control board 110 is inserted from the rear side of the main control board 110 through the hole 567 into the hole 566 of the cylindrical part 565 . The thread formed in the hole portion 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread formed in the shaft portion of the screw. As a result, the main control board 110 is sandwiched between the head of the screw and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565 so that the main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210 . That is, the main control board 110 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

A portion of the flange portion 211b of the control board housing portion 211, which protrudes from the plate portion 211a along two long sides of the plate portion 211a (hereinafter referred to as a “male portion”), is formed in an L shape. Three hooking pieces 211c are formed on each side. On the other hand, of the flange portion 221b of the control board housing portion 221, the portion projecting from the plate portion 221a along two long sides of the plate portion 221a (hereinafter referred to as the “female portion”) has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 221c into which the male portion of the control board housing portion 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. A hooking piece 221d is formed in each insertion groove portion 221c.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 110 is screwed and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the male portion of the flange portion 211b is inserted into the female portion of the flange portion 221b. Then, the control board housing portions 211 and 221 are slid relative to each other in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. 6 along the horizontal direction. Then, the hooking piece 211c provided on the male portion is engaged with the hooking piece 221d, so that the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α. be

When combined in this manner, the control board housings 211 and 221 form a box-shaped inner envelope 581 that is internally shielded from the outside. Since the main control board 110 is housed in the encapsulating portion 581, the possibility of unauthorized replacement of the main control board 110 and the main control section 110m can be suppressed.

The main control board 110 is attached inside the control board housing portion 221 before the control board housing portions 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, an IC or the like mounted on the main control board 110 is attached so as to face the plate portion 221a of the control board housing portion 221. As shown in FIG. Since the plate portion 221a is also made of transparent plastic, even if the main control board 110 is housed in the main board case 200, the electronic components such as the main control section 110m mounted on the main control board 110 can be maintained. This is because it is possible to check from the outside through the plate portion 221a whether or not the has been illegally replaced. In this embodiment, when the main control device 110A having the main board case 200 is attached to the game board 5, it is mounted on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 through the upper case piece 220 from the back side of the game machine 1. Electronic components can be visually recognized.

Sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at the right end portions of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, respectively. As shown in FIG. 34, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw-stopping piece 91 and a second screw-stopping piece 92 above the sealing portions 212 and 222, respectively. When the control board storage sections 211 and 221 are slid and combined, the sealing base section 310 is formed by the sealing sections 212 and 222 at the longitudinal ends of the sealing body 300 that combines them. Then, when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 by covering the sealing base part 310 , in addition to the first screwing piece 91 and the second screwing piece 92 , the ends of the sealing body 300 in the longitudinal direction are , and a third screw-stopping piece 393 of the cap 240 are overlapped to form a screw-stopping portion 390 for screwing.

The sealing portions 212 and 222 protrude rightward from the right end portions of the control board storage portions 211 and 221, respectively. The sealing portions 212 and 222 are formed to have the same height in the horizontal direction and the same width in the vertical direction. Long groove portions 212a and 222a are formed in the respective sealing portions 212 and 222 along the horizontal direction. Two parallel grooves 222a are formed in the left-right direction in the sealing portion 222 at a predetermined interval, and one groove 212a is formed in the sealing portion 212 in the left-right direction. When the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the sealing portions 212 and 222 form a sealing base portion 310 on the right side of the combined control board housing portions 211 and 221 . In the sealing base portion 310, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are arranged parallel to each other at a constant interval, and an inserting/removing space is formed between the surfaces of the sealing portions 212 and 222 facing each other.

The unsealing prohibition seal 250 is used as means for sealing the main circuit board case 200, and proves that it is a genuine product issued by an organization or the like having authentication qualifications. The unsealable seal 250 is made of an easy-to-cut material, such as paper, with an adhesive surface on one side, and has a plurality of cuts. As will be described later, for example, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark), and the like are printed on the unsealable seal 250 . The unsealing prohibition seal 250 is also printed with the words "unsealing prohibited".
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230 a , a pair of knob portions 361 and a cutting portion 364 . A base portion 230a serving as the base of the cutting member 230 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cut portion 364 is formed on one of the two long sides of the base portion 230a. The cutting portion 364 is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed into a blade shape. The gripping portions 361 are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base portion 230a, and are formed in a shape that is bent as a whole. A left end portion of the knob portion 361 is referred to as a free end portion 361a.

The cap 240 is formed in a size that can be put on the sealing base portion 310 to cover the entire sealing base portion 310 and is detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 . The cap 240 includes a bowl-shaped cap body 241 that covers the sealing base portion 310 and a third screw-stopping piece 393 formed at one longitudinal end of the cap body 241 . A protrusion 382 is formed on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end 361a of the knob 361 of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base 310. is provided. A groove portion 386 is formed in the inner surface of the cap main body 241 .

The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion/removal space of the sealing base portion 310 . After that, the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is affixed. Furthermore, when the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310, the groove portion 386 fits into a portion of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a. Also, the protrusion 382 engages with the free end portion 361a of the knob portion 361 of the cutting member 230 .

When the cap 240 is put on the sealing base part 310, the third screwing piece 393 is a combination of the first screwing piece 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the second screwing piece 92 of the upper case piece 220. to constitute a screwing portion 390 for screwing. When the crimping member 94 is driven into the screwing portion 390, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220 and the cap 240 are fixed to each other.

When unsealing the main substrate case 200 , the crimping member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310 . The same applies when the main board case 200 is unsealed. Cutting member 230 and cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base portion 310 at the same time. Then, the unsealable seal 250 is irreparably damaged by the cutting portion 364 or the like.

(main control board)
Next, the configuration of the main control board 110 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
The main control board 110 that controls the game includes a main control unit 110m, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, and a plurality of electronic components 595 (ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, coils, etc.), and a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, etc. are mounted.

The main control unit 110m stores memory contents used for game control. In addition, the main control unit 110m stores memory contents that affect the game results.
The main control unit 110m is a one-chip microcomputer integrating a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c, which will be described later.
A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right in the lower part of main control board 110 . A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided in the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200 .

Two connectors 774 and 775 out of the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are called detection signal connectors 774 and 775 . The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are connected to one of the first start hole detection switch 45a, the second start hole detection switch 47a, the general winning hole detection switch 43a, and the big winning hole detection switch 50a for detecting that the game ball has won. A signal from at least a portion is input. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include the first start hole detection switch 45a, the second start hole detection switch 47a, the general winning hole detection switch 43a, and the large winning hole detection switch 45a for detecting that the game ball has won. Assume that all signals of the switch 50a are input. The detection signal connectors 774 , 775 are a different color than the other connectors 771 , 772 , 773 , 776 . In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774, 775 are fluorescent, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776 are different from fluorescent.

The main control unit 110m includes a plate-shaped main body extending in the left-right direction, and a plurality of signal pins (first signal pins) extending downward from the lower end of the main body and electrically connected to the main control board 110. I have. A signal pin (first signal pin) is mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200 .
The plurality of electronic components 595 includes signal pins (second signal pins) provided for each of the plurality of electronic components. A signal pin (second signal pin) is mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200 .

The RWM clear switch 111a will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed. The upper case piece 220 of the board case 200 is provided with a recess 688 inside, and an opening 687 is provided in the recess 688 .
As can be seen from FIG. 5, the operation member 685 is provided at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. be done. As a result, the RWM clear switch 111a is operated.
A cover member 686 is provided within the recess 688 . The cover member 686 is rotatably supported in the recess 688 between a first position where the operation member 685 is closed to disable operation and a second position where the operation member 685 is opened and allowed to be operated. It is
By moving the operating member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 111a can be operated.
By doing so, it is only necessary to provide an opening 687 large enough to insert the operation member 685 in the substrate case 200 . Further, the operation member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, unauthorized access into the board case 200 can be prevented.
The RWM clear switch 111 a may have an end exposed through the opening 687 so that it can be directly operated without being operated using the operating member 685 .

The setting key switch 112a is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end face of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
The end face of the setting key switch 112a having the keyhole is exposed through the opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200, but slightly lower than the surface of the board case 200. FIG.
A staff member or the like can operate by inserting a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a.

(identification mark)
The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 110, the main control section 110m, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240. As shown in FIG.
The identification display 520 is a display containing information about the gaming machine 1 . In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the main control board 110 is referred to as identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the main control unit 110m is referred to as identification display 522. FIG. The identification mark 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is called identification mark 523, the identification mark 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is called identification mark 524, and the identification mark 520 provided on the cap 240 is called identification mark 523. Referred to as display 525 .

As shown in FIG. 5, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper back surface of the main control board 110 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. The identification mark 522 is attached to the main control unit 110m by stamping. The identification display 522 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200 are information identification portions for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by stamping with a mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 33).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by imprinting with the mold for manufacturing the cap 240 . A display mode of the identification display 523 will be described later.

Identifications 521 - 525 are related to each other and include at least the same identification 529 . In this embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string of "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string of "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string of "ABCD05". The same identification 529 among the identifications 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is, for example, a display corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, and the like. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name and "CD" represents the model name.

Incidentally, in the identification displays 521 to 525, the maker name itself may be displayed instead of displaying the maker name as "AB" included in "ABCD". Also, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed. Further, the identification displays 521 to 525 may display the model of the gaming machine.

(Seal member)
The sealing member will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 8 , a sealing member 1560 and a sealing member 1561 are attached to the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200 .

The seal member 1560 is attached to the position display portion 561 provided on the left lower portion of the upper case piece 220 in the left-right direction. affixed to.
Both of the sealing members 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmitting material, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent (made of a transparent material).
The seal members 1560 and 1561 are arranged across the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8), respectively. 5, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 positioned in front of the sealing members 1560 and 1561 is omitted.

Seal member 1560 is a seal for main board management.
In this example, a seal member body 1560A (base portion) of the seal member 1560 is provided with an anti-counterfeiting watermark. That is, the seal member 1560 (opener indication seal) is a processed seal obtained by watermarking the seal member main body 1560A.
A "watermark" is, for example, a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and can be applied to various types, such as using a hologram, or something that looks different depending on the physical shape. .
However, the sealing member main body 1560A is transparent even though it is subjected to a predetermined processing (watermark processing), and at least has high translucency to ensure a certain level of visibility.

The seal member 1560 has a white entry area 1570 (entry column), a code portion 1572, and an information display portion 1573 in a black frame with a headline such as "main board control number" on the seal member main body 1560A. I have.
The entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the character display associated with these areas, which will be described later, are non-transparent with low translucency because the transparent material of the sealing member main body 1560A is not exposed. Department.
The seal member 1560 has a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions, and it is difficult to visually recognize the main control board 110 inside the main board case 200 through these non-light-transmitting portions.
Code portion 1572, information display portion 1573, and entry area 1570 as non-light-transmitting portions are provided at positions on seal member main body 1560A that do not overlap with main control portion 110m and information display 113. FIG.

On the other hand, areas other than the writing area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the character display accompanying these areas in the sealing member main body 1560A are translucent because the transparent material of the sealing member main body 1560A is exposed. is the translucent portion 1574 with a high .
The translucent part 1574 is the above-described viewing part that allows the electronic component 595 on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 to be seen and confirmed through the transparent material.

In the main board case 200 , the main control board 110 can be visually recognized through the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200 . Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 110 . Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 110 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not there is fraud. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the light-transmitting portion or non-light-transmitting portion, the seal member 1560 is attached to the main control portion 110m on the main control board 110 at a position where the seal member 1562 is visible from all angles. It is
In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-translucent portion, the entire sealing member 1560 including the entry area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573 overlaps the main control portion 110m from all angles. It is provided so that it will be in a position where it will not
Therefore, when the main circuit board case 200 is viewed from the front, the main controller 110m can be visually recognized through the main circuit board case 200 without fail.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main controller 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control unit 110m and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-translucent portion, the sealing member 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, is positioned so that the entire sealing member 1560 does not overlap the information display 113 from any angle. It is provided so that
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the information display 113 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200 .

In FIG. 8, it cannot be said that the sealing member 1560 and the information display 113 are located close to each other. is sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776 and the sealing member 1561 does not overlap the information display 113, the sealing member 1560 and the information display 113 are positioned close to each other. may

The contents displayed on the seal member 1560 will be described in detail below.
The entry area 1570 is an area for entering the person who opened the main circuit board case 200 and the opening date.
A writing area 1570 is a white background formed on a transparent material and on which writing can be performed with a pen or the like.
As an example, the entry areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction for a total of six entry areas 1570, in which three sets of "opener" and "date of opening" can be entered.
The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background.

Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1570, and circled numbers indicating the number of the entry area are printed on the left side of each entry area.
That is, above the entry area 1570 on the upper left, "opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "date of opening" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570 . A circle 2 is printed to the left of the entry area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570 .

For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date of opening the main board case 200 in the entry area 1570 on the right side. . It should be noted that the inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date and the like when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 110 was tampered with.

The code portion 1572 is provided on the upper left portion of the seal member 1560 . Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. The code part 1572 is a part where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a bar code, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. there is In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “other device”).
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access the other device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information portable terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 110 (for example, the name of the store where the gaming machine 1 was delivered), and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. etc. is included. This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the main control board 110 of a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

The information display portion 1573 contains various information. The information display portion 1573 may include information similar to the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, in the information display section 1573, a character string “EF001” is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of main control board 110 . With this management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model number, and the like. Also, the rectangular region of the information display portion 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code portion 1572 are connected in the horizontal direction.

A translucent portion 1574 (peek portion) included in the sealing member 1560 will be described.
Translucent portion 1574 includes entry area 1570, code portion 1572, information display portion 1573, notation of “main board control number”, frame, opening person, notation of opening date, circle 1 to circle It is an area other than the notation of 3.
The translucent part 1574 is, for example, an area extending in the left-right direction that exists between the writing areas 1570 of three lines in the vertical direction.
The translucent portion 1574 is also an area extending in the left-right direction between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged side by side and the upper two entry areas 1570 .
The translucent part 1574 is also an area extending vertically between the writing areas 1570 in two rows in the horizontal direction.
The inspector can confirm the electronic component 595 (see FIG. 62(a)) through the translucent portion 1574 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, compared to the case where the translucent portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The sealing member 1561 will be explained.
The seal member 1561 is attached at a position where the seal member 1561 attached to the main control section 110m on the main control board 110 can be visually recognized from all angles.
The seal member 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the main control section 110m from all angles.
Therefore, when the main circuit board case 200 is viewed from the front, the main controller 110m can be visually recognized through the main circuit board case 200 without fail.
The seal member 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the information display 113 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the information display 113 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200 .

Also, the seal member 1561 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information.
For example, as specific information, at least one of model name, manufacturer name, rated voltage and total capacity is printed. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion on which these pieces of information are printed is also called a printing portion 1563 . Specific information displayed on the seal member 1561 is called an identification display 1595 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" including the model, the manufacturer name "AA company", the rated voltage and the total capacity (AC24V±5%, 250VA).
In addition, in the portion where the model name is displayed, a base is formed with a conspicuous color such as red or yellow against a transparent material, and the model name is displayed in white on the base.

A seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110m.
The seal member 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the seal member 1562 is printed with the model name “CR AIU GH101” and the manufacturer name “AA Company” as predetermined information. Specific information displayed on the seal member 1562 is called an identification display 1596 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the sealing member 1562 .
Moreover, the sealing member 1561 and the sealing member 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595 and 1596 . In the present embodiment, the species name "CR AIU", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA company" in the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is sufficient that some of them are the same.
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main circuit board case 200 and the main controller 110m, they may be attached to other members. For example, the main control board 110 may include and display the same identification marks as the identification marks 1595 and 1596 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the sealing members 1560 and 1561 are arranged across at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8). By confirming the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 110 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

In addition, since the sealing member 1560 is provided with an area 1575, the inspector can enter the name of the inspector and the date when the main circuit board case 200 was opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the entry area 1570). can be filled in. In addition, the inspector can enter in area 1575 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 110 was tampered with. Further, since the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion) is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than the case where only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters or the like written in the area 1575 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, since the sealing member 1560 is provided with the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion), the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion). Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, compared to the case where the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion) is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.
Also, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position not overlapping the main control portion 110m. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main controller 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control unit 110m and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the code portion 1572 is associated with information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 . This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 using the code portion 1572 . Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the main control board 110 of a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.
A seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110m, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal member 1562. FIG. Therefore, by checking the sealing member 1562, the inspector can easily check whether the main control unit 110m has been replaced illegally. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
At least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed on the seal member 1561, so the inspector can easily recognize at least one of the model name and manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name, and can easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

The various information displayed on the seal members 1560 and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the main control unit 110m to be visually recognized.
The main board case 200, especially the upper case piece 220, does not have a vent.
The main board case 200 has date marks formed on the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 .
The date mark is a mark for lot management added during manufacturing (molding) of the case, which is a plastic molded product.
As a feature of the present embodiment, a component having a height that makes the seal member 1562 invisible should not be provided in the vicinity of the main control unit 110m.

As described above, the main control board 110 is mounted with the main control section 110m for controlling the game, the information display 113 for displaying the performance of the gaming machine, and other electronic components 595 different from these. there is A transparent sealing member 1560 is attached to the main control board 110 . Accordingly, other electronic components 595 can be visually recognized through the transparent sealing member 1560 and the main board case 200 . In addition, the main controller 110m and the information display 113 can be directly viewed through the main board case 200. FIG.

Duplication of the seal member 1560 can be prevented by watermarking the transparent portion of the seal member 1560 which has a transparent portion and a plurality of non-transparent portions and which needs to be attached to the main substrate case 200 . In addition, by attaching the seal member 1560 to a position that does not cover the main control section 110m and the information display 113, the main control, which is an important board component, is not affected by the watermarking process or the multiple non-transparent portions. In the portion 110m, the visibility of the information display 113 that must be read accurately can be ensured.

As for the electronic component 595, which is less important than the main control unit 110m and the information display unit 113, the state can be confirmed through watermark processing through the gaps between the plurality of non-transparent portions and the surrounding transparent portion 1574 (peek portion). can be done. Even if there are a plurality of non-transparent portions, the visibility of the substrate component can be ensured by the transparent portions. Further, the non-transparent portion can display predetermined information, for example, necessary information such as specifying the main control unit 110m. Different information can be displayed or written in the plurality of non-transparent portions.

Note that the information display 113 may be arranged on the lower end side of the main control board 110 instead of the upper end side. In that case, the connectors 771 to 776 are desirably arranged on the upper end side opposite to the information display 113 (opposite).
The information display 113 may be arranged on the left end side or the right end side of the main control board 110 . In that case, the connectors 771 to 776 are desirably arranged at the opposite (opposite) ends to the information display 113 .
Also, as described above, the information display 113 may be arranged inside the main control board 110 instead of at the end. Even in that case, they must be arranged at positions that do not overlap cables, harnesses, sealing members 1560, etc. extending from the connectors 771-776.

In the present embodiment, the RWM clear switch 111a is described as being arranged on the main control board 110, but it is not limited thereto and may be provided on the payout control board 120. Also, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 112a is described as being arranged on the main control board 110, but it is not limited to this. If the setting key switch 112a is electrically connected to the main control board 110, the setting key switch 112a can be arranged at another position separated from the main control board 110. FIG.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic actions). The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program and the like, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing. It has an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling the controlled devices (such as various solenoids and various displays). device), or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow bidirectional command (data) communication, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. Commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130 .

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing corresponding to the detection signals is performed.

The output ports of the main control board 110 include the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the main information display device 59, the game information output terminal board 90, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like. is connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, and game information output terminal board to notify the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the output port Information and the like are output.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the reception of payout commands from the main control board 110 and controls the shooting of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls, and operates the payout device 100. Control, or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit. A payout motor 100 b provided in the payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121 .

When a payout command is received from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to perform control to put out a predetermined number of game balls. When the payout of the game ball is detected, the control of putting out the game ball is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b. ing.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b. When the change in rotation angle of the shooting handle 15 is detected by the detection signal from the shooting volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is shot so that the shooting intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the shooting handle 15. A solenoid 28b is driven to shoot a game ball.

The shooting solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the hitting member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. . The operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the game ball is fired in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed in the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110 . The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., display control unit 140, frame lighting device 10, button driving device 17b, board driving device 75, board lighting It has a lamp control section 150 that controls the device 76 and the like, and an input port and an output port for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. Various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) are controlled (data and command ).

The input port of the effect control board 130 is connected with the effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like. In the performance control board 130, a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 is operated is input from the performance button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 is operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. Also, it controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined sound.

The display control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of an effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the overall control unit 141. The image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on the reception, the CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and the reception of the voice control command from the general control unit 141 It has an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) for controlling the audio output device 9 based on the data, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes an integrated CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which a LSI) is connected.

The supervising CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the supervising control program stored in the supervising ROM 141b, and uses the supervising RAM 141c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effects. As a result, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting the display control command (display list) to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device 9, and performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command for instructing the effect sound to be output from 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The VRAM 143 provided in the image control unit 145 (VDP) is a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142a), and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , and a frame buffer area corresponding to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the “drawing frame buffer” of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 141, Drawing data is read from the "frame buffer for display" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 70 are displayed. Various images are displayed by outputting to the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

An operation clock is supplied from a crystal oscillator to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and by dividing this operation clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronizing signal (horizontal synchronizing signal/vertical synchronizing signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are generated. output to In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second=about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be 60 fps (1/60 second=approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on various production data (including commands) transmitted from the production control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effect received from the effect control unit 130m. In response to an effect instruction command, etc., it performs control (outputs data and commands) to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform a predetermined effect.

The frame lighting device 10, the button driving device 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 are connected to the input/output ports of the lamp control section, and the information is transmitted from the production control section 130m (sub-CPU 130a). Based on various production data (including commands) that have been generated, lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 is performed, and the button driving device 17b and the It also controls the driving of the driving source such as the motor and the solenoid of the board driving device 75 .

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 from power supplied from the outside of the game machine 1, and controls the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control). substrate 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure); A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when power is cut off (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from power failure (power failure), the control state of the game is restored to the state before power failure (power failure). can be restored. A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 .

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, it has a "low probability state" and a "high probability state" as the state related to the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and "non-time-saving state" and " It has a "time saving state".

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) Low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) that is “low-probability state” and “non-time-saving state”
(2) Low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is “low-probability state” and “time-saving state”
(3) High-probability time-saving gaming state (probability variable gaming state) that is “high-probability state” and “time-saving state”

In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability short-time game state". In addition, in the present embodiment, the "low-probability short-time gaming state" and "high-probability short-time gaming state" may be referred to as "specific game state" because they are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In the present embodiment, the "low probability state" is, for example, when the set value (jackpot probability in jackpot determination), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is "1", the first start port 45 or the second It refers to a game state in which the winning probability of the big win is set as low as about 1/300 in the judgment of the big win of the special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball enters the 2 start hole 47.例文帳に追加On the other hand, in the "high probability state", the probability of winning the jackpot is improved compared to the low probability state. It says the game state.

Specifically, there are 4 types of set values from "1" to "4", and when the set value is "1", the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state is about 1/300, which is a high probability. The probability of winning the jackpot in the state is about 1/60, and when the set value is "2", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability state is about 1/295, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability state is about If the set value is "3", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is about 1/290, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/58, and the set value is " 4", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is about 1/285, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high-probability state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability state". Also, the change from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state is referred to as "variable probability jackpot". Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability state is called a "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, "non-time-saving state" means that in the normal pattern winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result It refers to a game state which is set longer than the "time-saving state" and tends to set the opening time of the second starting port 47 short when winning is won. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the normal pattern display device 62. For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving state" means that in the normal pattern winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result is " The game state is set shorter than the "non-time-saving state" and set longer than the "non-time-saving state", for example, 2.5 seconds for the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning. Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving state", the probability of winning the winning lottery of normal symbols is set as low as 1/128, and in the "time-saving state", the probability of winning the winning lottery of normal symbols is set to 127/128, for example. and is set high. Therefore, in the "time saving state", when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44 than in the "non-time saving state", the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode. As a result, in the "time-saving state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game in a state where it is difficult to consume game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time saving state" is set so that the normal pattern fluctuation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery are advantageous compared to the "non-time saving state" It is However, the "time saving state" may be set so that only one of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. In addition, in the non-time saving state, the probability of winning the winning lottery of the normal symbols may be set to 0/128, for example.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is five times the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state (common regardless of the set value). The probability of occurrence is not limited to 5 times, and may be set to an arbitrary value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as the value is 10 times or less.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is designed not to win a small win that is less advantageous to the advantageous person than the big win in the judgment of the big win. good too. In this case, it is preferable to set the small winning probability to be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous it is to the player (the higher the probability of a big hit). can be

In addition, the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the low probability state and / or high probability state may be the same for all setting values (1 to 4), for example, two or three setting values (1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of being determined as a big win in the low probability state and/or the high probability state may be the same. Also, the set values in this embodiment are in four stages from 1 to 4, but are not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13. FIG.

(jackpot judgment table)
FIG. 10(a) is a big hit determination table for the first special symbol for determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. , FIG. 10(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b), the jackpot determination table corresponds to the current set value, the current probability state, the random number for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, lose). As a reference, the approximate winning probability in the case of a "jackpot" is described in the rightmost column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 10A or the second special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Based on the random number value for judgment, it is judged whether it is a "big win" or a "loss".

For example, according to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. The random number for judgment is judged to be a "jackpot". Then, a random value for judging a big win other than that judged to be a big win is judged to be "losing".

In addition, the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the game ball to the second starting port 47 The special figure determination information obtained based on the winning is stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when the jackpot determination is performed, the special figure determination information stored in the first special figure determination information reservation storage area or the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the special figure determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c. , Jackpot determination will be performed using the shifted special figure determination information.

In addition, the first special figure determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the holding corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit Icons are displayed in the first display portion 70B1 to the fourth display portion 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B. The second special figure determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the holding icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first storage unit to the fourth storage unit They are displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D.

(Special pattern judgment table)
FIG. 11(a) is a special symbol determination table for big hits for determining the type of special symbols when it is determined as a big hit, and FIG. 11(b) is a special symbol determination table when it is determined as a loss. It is a special symbol determination table for losing for determining the type.

As shown in FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b), the special symbol determination table includes types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, random numbers for special symbol determination, determination results of the special symbols, and corresponding determination results. Stop special figure data and the special design designation command which corresponds to the decision result are matched.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special symbols "01" and "04" are special jackpot patterns for executing the first jackpot game, and the special patterns "02" and "05" are jackpot patterns for executing the second jackpot game. , the special symbol “03” is a jackpot symbol for executing the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 6 times in which the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses. Further, after the end of the first jackpot game, the low-probability short-time gaming state (short-time gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 10 times, in which the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. Further, after the second jackpot game is finished, the high-probability short-time game state (probability-variable game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost decided.

In the "third jackpot game", a round game is executed up to four times, in which the second big prize opening 56 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then the big prize opening is closed for 2 seconds. Further, after the end of the third jackpot game, the high-probability short-time game state (probability-variable game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost decided.

Although each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with one unsuccessful special symbol, at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with a plurality of unsuccessful special symbols. good too.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any of FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b), and based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed and the random number for special symbol determination, the type of special symbol, Stop special figure data and special design specification command are decided, special design specification command is transmitted to production control baseplate 130.

A first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the types of special symbols for big hits and the types of special symbols for loss are the same without changing depending on the setting values. By doing so, it is possible for the player to play the game with peace of mind without making the game complicated.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure variation pattern determination table)
Figure 12 (a) is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state for determining the special symbol variation pattern in the non-time saving state, Figure 12 (b) is a special symbol variation pattern in the time saving state It is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving state for determining.

As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure variation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting port) that performs variation display, the big hit determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special figure data), and the reach determination Random number, 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or 2nd special figure reservation number (U2), random number for special figure variation pattern determination, special figure variation pattern as determination result, and special symbol variation time And, the special figure variation pattern specification command indicating the special figure variation pattern is associated.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 2 Based on the number of special figure reservations (U2) and the random number for special figure variation pattern determination, the special figure variation pattern is determined, and a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern is transmitted to the production control board 130. It's like

In addition, as will be described later, the effect control board 130 determines the content (effect mode) of the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a according to the variation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.). Since it is designed to do, the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 describes the production contents that can be executed in the variable production as a reference.

"Normal fluctuation", "Short fluctuation", "Super short fluctuation", and "Long fluctuation" are shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , It is a production that stops without reaching.

In addition, "ready-to-win" means that the player expects that a jackpot game will be executed in which some of the combinations of the performance symbols 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a performance that makes For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a for notifying a big hit, the same performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at "7" in the left area and the right area. , refers to a mode in which the remaining production patterns 70a are changing in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the production pattern 70a swings slightly or is slightly deformed to make it appear to the player that the production pattern 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

"Normal reach" means a reach performance in which the same performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right regions and the remaining one performance pattern 70a fluctuates in the central region, and the expectation of a big hit is the lowest. It is a reach performance.

"SP ready-to-win" and "special SP ready-to-win" are super ready-to-win effects with a higher expectation for a big hit than normal ready-to-win, and the development effects are executed from the normal ready-to-win effects, and then executed. For example, the two production patterns 70a are reduced in size from the normal size and moved to the upper part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (the production pattern 70a forming the ready-to-reach state becomes smaller than the normal size. I), almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is used to perform a special ready-to-win effect. In addition, in the "special SP reach", a more special effect than in the "SP reach" is executed.

"SPSP ready-to-win" and "SPSP '7' ready-to-win" are special ready-to-win productions with a higher expectation of a big win than super ready-to-win, and are executed after normal ready-to-win production or super ready-to-win production. For example, the development effect is executed from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect patterns 70a are reduced to the minimum size and moved to the upper left corner of the screen of the first image display device 70 (the effect pattern 70a forming the reach state is smaller than the normal size), and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is used to perform a special ready-to-win effect rather than "SP ready-to-win". In addition, in "SPSP ready-to-win", the ready-to-win effect is executed by the effect pattern 70a other than "7", and in "SPSP "7" ready-to-win", the ready-to-win effect is executed by the pattern of "7".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach at which the jackpot is determined, and is executed after the normal reach effect. For example, the development effect is executed from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect patterns 70a are changed at a low speed in a state where they are all the same, and "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Or "SPSP '7' reach" special reach effect (big hit confirmed reach effect) is performed.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot related to the ready-to-win effect is higher in the order of normal ready-to-win effect<SP ready-to-win effect<SPSP ready-to-win effect<all-rotation ready-to-win effect (big win confirmed).

In addition, when the shortened variation or the super-shortened variation is executed, the three performance symbols 70a start the variable display by the first start display mode in which the three performance symbols 70a start the variable display (scroll) at the same time, and the three performances The production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped by the first stop display mode in which the pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at the same time, and other fluctuation productions (normal fluctuation, long fluctuation, normal reach, SP reach, special SP reach, SPSP reach, SPSP When "7" reach and all-rotation reach are executed, the three production patterns 70a start to variably display (scroll) in the order of left → right → middle. The production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped by the second stop display mode in which the three production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the order of left→right→middle.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the type of special figure variation pattern to be determined is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

As the third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, when the first special figure reservation number increases to 2 or 3 in the non-time saving state, shortening variation is determined as the variation pattern of the first special symbol While it becomes easier, even if the second special symbol reservation number increases to 2 or 3 in the non-time saving state, the point is that the shortening variation is not determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbol when hitting the left side rather than when hitting the right side in the non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As the fourth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, even if the number of first special figure reservations increases to 1 to 3 in the time saving state, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is (super) shortened While the variation is not determined, when the second special symbol pending number increases to 1 to 3 in the time saving state, (long) shortening variation is easily determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbol in the case of hitting to the right than in the case of hitting to the left in the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

As the fifth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In the case where the first special symbol losing variation display (first variation effect that becomes a loss) is executed during There are few types). By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect during the non-time-saving state in which the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is likely to be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the sixth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In the case where the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production that becomes a jackpot) is executed during There are few types). By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect during the non-time-saving state in which the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is likely to be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the seventh feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In the case where the first special symbol losing variation display (first variation effect that becomes a loss) is executed, the variation display (variation effect) by the same variation pattern is more likely to be executed (the type of variation pattern to be executed is less). By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect during the time-saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is likely to be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the eighth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In the case where the first special symbol jackpot variation display (first variation effect that becomes a jackpot) is executed at the time of is less). By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect during the time-saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is likely to be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the ninth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that there are more types of variation patterns to be executed in the case where the second special symbol loss variation display (the second variation effect that becomes a loss) is performed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect during the time-saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is likely to be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the tenth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, the first special figure reservation in the case of executing the first special symbol loss variation display (second variation effect that becomes a loss) during the non-time saving state Than the difference between the average variation time with the maximum number (here "3") and the average variation time with a predetermined number less than the maximum number (eg "1"), the first special symbol during the time saving state A predetermined number less than the average fluctuation time and the maximum number of the maximum number of the first special figure reservation number (here "3") when executing the loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation effect that becomes a loss) (for example, "1 ”) The difference between the average fluctuation time is smaller no). By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect during the non-time-saving state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The eleventh feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. is the maximum number (here "3") than the difference between the average variation time at a predetermined number (eg "1") less than the maximum number, the loss of the first special symbol during the time saving state A predetermined number less than the average fluctuation time and the maximum number (for example, "1") at the maximum number of the first special figure pending number (here, "3") when executing the fluctuation display (first fluctuation effect that becomes a loss) ) is smaller than the difference between the average fluctuation time (strictly speaking, when the first special symbol is displayed during the time saving state, there is no difference in the average fluctuation time due to the number of the first special figure pending ) points. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect during the time saving state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that, when performing the loss variation display of the first special symbol in the time saving state (the first variation effect to be a loss), a difference may be provided in the average variation time according to the number of first special symbol reservations. Specifically, when the first special figure reservation number is "0" or "1", a long variation with a variation time of 12 seconds is performed, and when it is "2" or "3", the variation time is 10 A normal variation of seconds should be performed. Even in this case, the first special figure pending number is the maximum number (here "3") in the case of executing the losing variation display of the first special symbol during the non-time saving state Average variation time and the maximum number than the difference from the average variation time with a predetermined number (for example, "1") that is smaller than the maximum number of the first special figure pending number (here It is preferable to make the difference between the average fluctuation time at "3") and the average fluctuation time at a predetermined number smaller than the maximum number (for example, "1") smaller.

In addition, when executing the first special symbol jackpot variation display (first variation effect that becomes a jackpot) even during the non-time saving state or the time saving state, the average fluctuation time by the first special figure pending number A difference may be provided in . Even in this case, the first special figure pending number in the non-time saving state is the maximum number (here "3") and the average fluctuation time at a predetermined number less than the maximum number (e.g. "1") Than the difference with the average fluctuation time, the number of first special figure pending in the time saving state is the maximum number (here, the average fluctuation time at "3" and the predetermined number less than the maximum number (e.g. "1") It is preferable to make the difference from the average time smaller.

As the twelfth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. It is executed by a variation pattern whose variation time is shorter than the variation pattern of the maximum variation time executed when executing the jackpot variation display of one special symbol or when executing the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol during the time saving state. points. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect in the non-time-saving state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is likely to be executed and in the time-saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, and the interest of the game. can be improved.

(Advance judgment table)
FIG. 13A is a non-time-saving state pre-determination table for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 during the non-time-saving state. , FIG. 13(b) is a pre-determination table for time saving state for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47 during time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the preliminary determination table, the type of special symbol (starting port), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value , Toku-zu scheduled variation pattern as a determination result, and the look-ahead designation command indicating the toku-zu scheduled variation pattern are associated.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special figure variation pattern" can specify the special symbol type, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, the special symbol type, and the special figure variation pattern to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 13, and based on the random number value for jackpot determination, the random number value for special symbol determination, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, the special figure scheduled variation. A pattern is determined, and a look-ahead designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing main processing of the main control board 110 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and waits for activation of other boards in step S3. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S7 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step S8 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S9 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs setting change processing in step S9. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the setting value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. display the current setting values saved in , and transmit a setting change designation command to the performance control board 130. - 特許庁

Further, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) within the range of "1" to "4", and the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is turned off. When there is a setting confirmation operation to change from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting value after change (update) is saved in the setting value area as confirmation of the setting value, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is terminated. At the same time, the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

Incidentally, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed is performed. Specifically, a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are displayed in a predetermined manner during the setting change. All of the LEDs are lit in a luminescent color (for example, white). Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (the data in the game RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the game RWM area is abnormal), Assuming that the control state before the power-off cannot be normally restored, the process proceeds to step S12.

If the backup flag is not saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S12. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130 , set interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing non-restorable error notification is performed.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Although the "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be canceled when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

The "unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred. ) is displayed, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 76 for the board are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the voice output device 9. An unrecoverable error sound ("This is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "drawing device."

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S14 assuming that the RWM clear is to be executed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability short-time game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process proceeds to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized. ), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is displayed from the audio output device 9. A power-on notification sound (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating initialization is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S17 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the setting value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. display the current setting values saved in , and transmit a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

Further, when the setting key switch 112a is turned off from the ON state, when the confirmation end operation is performed, the display of the set values on the information display 113 is ended, and the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is ended. Perform processing to end the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation is being performed is performed. Specifically, a setting checking screen indicating that the setting is being checked is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and predetermined light emission is performed while the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are checking the setting. All the lights are lit in a color (for example, white). Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Confirming the setting value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (0 clears) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 130, the processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification is performed.

"Power restoration notification" is notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before power interruption, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect) at the time of power restoration on the image display devices 70 and 71 symbol “135”), or the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are fully lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 to output a power recovery notification sound ("power has been restored" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power failure) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the notification of power recovery, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the power has been restored.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a sends other commands (first special figure reservation number (U1) and special figure reservation number designation command indicating the second special figure reservation number (U2), general figure reservation number (G) Ordinary figure holding number designation command etc. shown) is transmitted to the production control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures and the number of reserved normal figures, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70 is performed. will be done.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the special symbol variation mode (variation time) and the special symbol determination random number value. An initial value random value updating process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply substrate 160. If the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S24 to detect power failure. If a signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupts, performs processing to clear the output port in step S28, and clears the game RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c in step S29. ) are calculated and saved in the game RWM area, and in step S30, a backup flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, Processing for prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the system waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, making it difficult to change settings easily. It is possible to

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to be performed, and to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, so that the game machine may perform unexpected operations, causing inconvenience to the game store and players. It becomes possible to improve the reliability of the game machine.

Also, if the value in the setting value area is not within the proper range, that is, if there is a possibility that the previous power failure occurred while the settings were being changed, unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game by pressing the button, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game arcade is set. Become.

In addition, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the lighting device for the frame are displayed on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. 10 and the board illumination device 76, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed, and on the back side (rear side), it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113. ing. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

Note that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, fraud can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

Also, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and it is determined that there has been no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing will be performed. is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. Then, the process may be moved to step S13.

Also, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (that is, the power is restored) and that there is no setting change operation, and if it is determined that the checksum is abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. , the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

Also, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the game program calculates the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c. may be calculated. In this case, the calculated checksum should be saved in the information RWM area.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing may be performed.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting is changed, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting is changed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
Timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the special game timer counter such as update processing of the special symbol time counter, opening time of the special electric accessory, etc. , update processing of normal symbol time counter, update processing of opening and closing time of movable member 48, and other time control processing for updating various timer counters. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening timer counter, a starting opening closing timer counter, or the like is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for judging a special symbol, a random number for judging a special symbol variation pattern, a random number for judging a hit, a random number for determining a normal symbol, and a random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Performs specific random number update processing for updating the random number used. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The random value is newly updated by setting the initial value random value to be used as a new cycle initial value.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a sets the initial random number value for judging a big hit, the initial random number value for judging a special symbol, the initial random number value for judging a hit, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol in step S130. Initial value random value update process to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the normal winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, and the like. Input control processing is performed to determine whether or not there is an input to each switch, and to set predetermined data if there is an input. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a determines the number of reserved special symbols (judgment of a big hit, etc.), controls the display of special symbols, controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), controls the game state, and so on. Perform control processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal pattern normal electric control processing for performing normal pattern storage number determination (hit determination, etc.), normal pattern display control, opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. conduct.

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, the type of the normal pattern loss is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or controls a prize ball counter (three prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter), and perform payout control processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 . As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the payout device 100 .

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of magnetic anomaly or radio wave anomaly based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a. A magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination process for transmitting a command to the production control board 130 is performed. When the effect control board 130 receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command or an electric wave anomaly error designation command, it performs control for performing magnetic anomaly error notification or electric wave anomaly error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting opening/closing data to be output to the second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b to output. Winning opening opening/closing data, first special symbol display device 60, and special symbol display data output to second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data output to normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, and special design reservation display data to be output to the second special design reservation display device 64, data creation processing to create data such as normal design reservation display data to be output to the normal design reservation display device 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S700, the starting opening opening/closing data, and the big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol reserved display data and normal symbol reserved display data, and payout command transmission processing for sending the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 Also, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, big winning opening, starting opening) during the normal gaming state, A process for counting the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a regardless of the game state, is performed. .

It should be noted that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected even if the set values are changed (irrelevant to the set values). By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (a normal base value, which will be described later) from which the influence of the set value is eliminated, and it is possible to use it to grasp the performance of the gaming machine 1 .

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the RWM area for information is calculated. Save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of .

The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game interval two times before, and a normal base value in the game interval three times before A fourth area is provided for playing, and base values for four game intervals including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area are displayed on the information display device 113 while being switched every five seconds. Performs processing for setting performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, no timer interrupt is executed in the setting change process, RWM clear process, and setting confirmation process. Since the performance information is not displayed, the control load on the main control board 110 can be reduced.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. FIG. Also, the game ball counting process may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110 . Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. In this general winning hole detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43 or not. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the winning ball counter (5 winning ball counter) for the general winning hole used for winning balls is updated by adding data indicating 5 winning balls. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updated (D←D+1), and then the normal winning hole detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning hole detecting switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detecting switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning hole detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter for the big winning hole (15 winning ball counter) used for winning balls. The winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entering the winning hole is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1) to determine whether the jackpot game (special game) is currently in progress. determine whether When the jackpot game is currently in progress, the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have won the jackpot 50 is updated by adding "1" (C←C+1) to the jackpot. Terminate the detection switch input process.

If the current game state is not the special game state, the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific winning hole (second starting hole 47, big winning hole 50) outside the winning period. The counter (E) is updated by adding "1" (E←E+1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the fraudulent winning ball counter (E) is greater than a specified number (for example, 10), resulting in fraudulent winning. When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the fraudulent prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, it is assumed that the fraudulent prize winning (illegal prize winning) occurs outside the winning period, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is specified. Set the command in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the error designation command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 informs that the fraudulent winning has occurred by performing the fraudulent winning error notification.

Then, the external information data (output data) for outputting the illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect the large winning opening. End switch input processing. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. In this first starting hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starting hole detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. In this second starting opening detection switch input process, substantially the same processing as the first starting opening detection switch input process shown in FIG. 17, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process is terminated.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations, which is the number of normal pattern reservation memories stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area, is less than four. When the number of general pattern reservations is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the normal pattern reservation number is less than 4, add "1" to the normal pattern reservation number and update it, normal pattern determination information (random number for hit judgment, normal pattern determination random value, normal pattern fluctuation pattern Random number for determination) is acquired, and the vacant storage units are searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired normal pattern judgment information is stored in the vacant storage unit and input. End the control process.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting opening detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 . FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the first start hole detection switch 45a has been input (a game ball has won the first start hole 45). When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination information ( Random number for jackpot judgment, random number for special pattern judgment, random number for reach judgment, random number for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four in step S230-4. When the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and when the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, this first start End the mouth detection switch input process.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special figure pending number (U1) to update (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the updated first special figure Set the first special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the figure reservation number (U1) in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the 1st special figure reservation number specification command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the 1st special figure reservation number.

The main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the first special symbol reservation storage area in step S230-7. Specifically, since the first special symbol reservation storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit, and the vacant storage unit Stores the acquired special figure determination information.

As described above, in the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, and special figure fluctuation pattern determination random values, etc.) will be stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the non-time-saving gaming state. If it is in the non-time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state, this first start opening detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-9. In this first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure determination information (first reservation storage) acquired this time is displayed before the special symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information is performed. A scheduled variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be determined and executed, is determined.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first look-ahead designation command corresponding to the scheduled variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process of step S230-8 in the effect transmission data storage area, 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

As a result, the first look-ahead specified command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 executes 1 or before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead specified command. It is possible to execute a look-ahead foretelling effect that executes a predetermined foretelling effect over a plurality of variable displays. It should be noted that the pre-reading notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the lighting device 10 for the frame, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the lighting device 76 for the board. is done using

In addition, for the second starting opening detection switch input processing, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the first starting opening 45, the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first reservation storage, the number of first special symbol reservations (U1), 1st special symbol reservation number designation command, 1st pre-determination process, 1st prefetch designation command, respectively, 2nd start opening detection switch 47a, 2nd start opening 47, 2nd special design reservation storage area, 2nd reservation storage, The second special figure reservation number (U2), the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second pre-determination process, the second look-ahead designation command may be replaced.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the special figure special electric control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special special electric processing data loaded in step S302, executes processing corresponding to the branch destination address, This special figure special electric control processing ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the reservation storage (special figure judgment information), the fluctuation time is set, and the command at the start (special Design storage designation command, game state designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) to the production control board 130 processing and processing to change the special figure special electric processing data to "1" etc. A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for the purpose is executed. The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the variable display of the special figure is stopped by the lapse of the variation time, the stop time (for example 0.5 seconds) is set, and the stop command (special figure stop command) is produced. A special symbol variation process (step S320) for performing a process for transmitting to the substrate 130, a process for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "2", or the like is executed.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, by the lapse of the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds), if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0", and if it is a big hit special symbol, it is a big hit. A game opening time is set, a process for transmitting an opening designation command to the performance control board 130, and a special symbol stop process (step S330) for changing the special symbol special electric process data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process for starting the round game by the lapse of the opening time of the big hit game and transmitting the round number designation command to the production control board 130 and the big hit based on the end of the final round game A jackpot game process (step S340) for performing a process for setting the game ending time and transmitting an ending designation command to the effect control board 130, a process for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", etc. is executed. do.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing to end the jackpot game by the passage of the ending time and the game state after the jackpot (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state, high probability number, time-saving number ), a process for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "0", and the like (step S350).

In addition, counting the number of times of execution of variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the end of the jackpot game state (normal game state, time saving game state, probability variable game state ), and when the variable display of the special symbol that is the predetermined number of times (eg, 800 times) is stopped and displayed, if it is not in the probability variation game state, the variable display of the special symbol is executed 600 times. Until), the first special time saving state (time saving game state) may be generated. In this first special time-saving state, the same various tables as in the normal time-saving game state (jackpot determination table, special symbol determination table, special figure variation pattern determination table, pre-determination table, etc.) are used, but from the normal time-saving game state may also be disadvantageous to the player, for example, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is lower than the normal time-saving game state (127/128) (for example, it is a higher probability than the non-time-saving state 100/128 or 1/128 which is the same probability as the non-time saving state), and the average fluctuation time of normal symbols may be the same as the normal time saving game state.

In addition, as a result of the big hit determination, a special loss different from the normal loss is provided, and when the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol won in the special loss, it must be in a probability variable gaming state. , You may make it generate|occur|produce a 2nd special time saving state (time saving game state) over predetermined times (for example, until the variable display of a special design is performed 50 times). In this second special time-saving state, the same various tables as in the normal time-saving game state (jackpot determination table, special symbol determination table, special figure variation pattern determination table, pre-determination table, etc.) are used, but from the normal time-saving game state may also be disadvantageous to the player, for example, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is lower than the normal time-saving game state (127/128) (for example, it is a higher probability than the non-time-saving state 100/128 or 1/128 which is the same probability as the non-working time saving state), and the average fluctuation time of normal symbols may be the same as the normal working time saving game state.

In addition, when a special loss is won during the normal time-saving game state and the special losing special symbol is stop-displayed, the normal time-saving game state and the second special time-saving state may be generated in a superimposed manner. , In this case, it is preferable to maintain the performance of the normal time-saving game state (probability of winning in normal symbol lottery, (average) fluctuation time of normal symbols, etc.).

In addition, if the normal time-saving game state and the second special time-saving state occur at the same time, the performance of the normal time-saving game state (probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery, normal pattern (average) fluctuation time, etc. ), and if the normal time-saving game state ends first and becomes the second special time-saving state, the performance of the normal time-saving game state (probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery, normal pattern (average) fluctuation time, etc.).

In addition, when the special losing special pattern is stopped and displayed during the first special time saving state, the first special time saving state and the second special time saving state may be generated in a superimposed manner. However, the first special time saving state may be maintained and the second special time saving state may not be generated.

In addition, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery in the non-time saving state and various time saving states (normal time saving game state, first special time saving state, second special time saving state) is the same (e.g. 120/128), and from the non-time saving state Also, the (average) variation time of normal symbols in various time saving states may be shortened.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being variably displayed, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbols are not being variably displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. When the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-3, and when the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4 to move.

The main CPU 110a updates the second special figure reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1" in step S310-3, and corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction in step S310-6. A special pattern storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the processing for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. Perform the shift processing of the data stored in the first storage unit ~ the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit The special figure determination information used in the previous game that was held is erased.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. When the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-5, and when the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1 to move.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special figure reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special figure corresponding to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after subtraction A pattern storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the processing for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8 stores it in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Perform shift processing of the data that has been, to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit ~ fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is erased.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first special figure reservation number (U1) and the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction are stored in the main RAM 110c is set in a predetermined area. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

Also, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information holding storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information holding storage area (the number of second special figure reservations is shifted to the second 1 special figure reservation number is preferentially subtracted), but the first special figure judgment information reservation storage area or the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area in the order in which the game ball entered the start hole You may shift (subtract the first special figure reservation number and the second special figure reservation number in order of winning), or give priority to the first special figure determination information reservation storage area over the second special figure determination information reservation storage area (The first special figure reservation number is preferentially subtracted over the second special figure reservation number).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a performs a big hit determination process. Specifically, the special figure determination information (random number value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is collated with the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Determine whether or not In addition, the special symbol determination information (random number for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area is collated with the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, and the special symbol to be stopped Perform processing to determine the type of

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable effect is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure variation pattern determination processing in step S313. Specifically, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area is collated with the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Perform processing to determine the special figure variation pattern (variation time).

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern type determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variation performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the variation performance performed during the variable display of the special symbols, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 , to start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creating process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of the step S800. In the special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. When the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended, and when the customer waiting state flag is not set, the processing is moved to step S319-2. It should be noted that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of special symbols and the special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirements include that the variable display of normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. may

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demonstration effect for prompting the player to play is performed.

(Main processing of production control unit)
Next, the main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the effect control section 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 130b, flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing for updating various random values stored in the sub-RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a timer interrupt process that is executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the production button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and performs processing of setting predetermined data when there is an input.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, it determines whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing in step E170. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received. Processing for executing change notification is performed, and when the setting confirmation designation command is received, processing for executing the above-described setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power-on designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power-on notification is performed. Specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a power-on screen, or to output audio. For example, the device 9 is caused to output a power-on sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power failure restoration notification is performed. Specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display a power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or to output audio. For example, the device 9 is caused to output a power restoration sound.

In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a customer-waiting state designation command has been received, and if the command has been received, processing for performing a customer-waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined time has elapsed is performed. conduct. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or to display a voice For example, the output device 9 outputs a customer waiting demonstration sound. Details of the customer waiting effect processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state designation command has been received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c when the command has been received. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in step E400. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not the special figure reservation number designation command or the general figure reservation number designation command is received, and if it is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c (grasp ) Perform processing to update the number of the first special figure reservation, the number of the second special figure reservation, the number of general figure reservations, etc.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead effect process. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not a prefetch designation command or a special figure variation pattern designation command is received, and if it is received, the icon change as a prefetch system effect Processing related to production, continuous advance notice production, and lamp change production is performed. The details of the look-ahead effect processing will be described later.

The “icon change effect” is a type of preview effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by changing the display mode of the pending icon and the icon. Note that, in the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a suspended icon may be referred to as a "suspended icon change effect", and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as a "pertinent icon change effect".

A “continuous advance notice effect” is a type of foreseeing advance notice effect that makes a player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.
"Lamp change effect" is a kind of fore-reading forewarning effect that makes a player expect a big win game to be executed by changing the lighting mode of the prize winning hole lamp over one or more variable effects.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special special electric effect process. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round number designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command etc. is received, and if received, processing is performed to execute an effect corresponding to the received command.

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a carries out a general/universal electric presentation process. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, the normal design designation command, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command, the normal pattern stop designation command, the opening designation command for winning, and the ending designation command for winning, etc. are received. It determines whether or not the command is present, and performs processing for executing an effect corresponding to the received command when the command is received.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs effect mode update processing. Specifically, an effect mode (effect stage) in which effect elements (background image, effect image, effect sound, BGM, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc., are defined. , depending on the progress of the game, the update conditions (change in game state, win of mode update lottery at the start of variable production, start of variable production after SP / SPSP reach production with a losing result is executed. or the like) is established, and processing for updating the production mode to any one of a plurality of production modes is performed when the update condition is established.

"Production mode" is production mode A to C set in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), production mode D to E set in the probability variable game state (high probability short-time game state), and time saving There are production modes F to G that are set in the gaming state (low-probability short working hours game state: including the first special short working hours state and the second special short working hours state described above). It should be noted that when the power is turned on and the normal game state is controlled (for example, after changing the settings, after clearing the RWM, after confirming the settings, etc.), the effect mode that is set first is always the effect mode A, and the power is turned on. The performance mode that is set first when controlled to the variable probability game state at the time of ON is always the performance mode D, and the performance mode that is first set when controlled to the time-saving game state at the time of power ON. is always in production mode F.

In addition, in the production modes A to C, the production pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters corresponding to the numbers (decoration part) + pattern effect images (decoration part) that decorate the background of the numbers and characters, Designs of numbers and characters are different between production modes. In the production modes D to F, the production pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters), and the design of the numbers is common among the production modes. In the production modes A to F, the background image corresponding to each production mode is scrolled left and right (reciprocating motion).

In addition, regardless of the production mode, at the start of the variable production, the production pattern 70a can be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation) and then scrolled (updated to another production pattern). ~ C (normal game state), when the first special symbol pending number is "1" or "2" when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is started, before scroll display While the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production design 70a is performed, the first variation production (variation display of the first special design) is started from the state where the first special figure reservation number is "3" or "4". In the case, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is not performed before the scroll display, and in the production modes D to G (specific game state), the first special figure pending number is "1" to "4". When the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is started from , the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect symbol 70a is performed before the scroll display. That is, when the first variable effect is executed during the normal game state and when the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a is executed. are different. Therefore, it is possible to change the presentation mode at the start of the first variable presentation in accordance with the game state (the presentation mode), thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, in the production mode D ~ G (specific game state), when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed from the state where the number of the first special figure pending is "1" ~ "4" , When the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is performed before the scroll display, and the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed from the state where the second special figure reservation number is "1" , while the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is performed before the scroll display, the second special pattern reservation number is changed from the state of "2" to "4" to the second fluctuation production (variation of the second special pattern display) is executed, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a is not performed before the scroll display. That is, when the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state and when the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a is executed. are different. Therefore, it is possible to change the presentation mode at the start of the first variable presentation in accordance with the game state (the presentation mode), thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the preparatory motion before scrolling the effect pattern 70a may be displayed in an enlarged manner instead of being displayed in a reduced size, or may be displayed in a floating manner by floating upward from the stop position. Also, in the production modes D to G (specific game state), when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is started, the preparatory operation of the production design 70a is not performed before the scroll display. may

Further, when the production pattern 70a performs the preparation operation at the start of the variable production, the three production patterns 70a are made to start scrolling in the order of left, middle and right, and when the preparation operation is not performed, the three production patterns 70a are displayed. The effect pattern 70a may start scroll display at the same time.

In addition, regarding the update condition of the production mode, the first special symbol during the specific game state is higher than the case where the variation performance (first variation performance) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal game state. When the variable effect (first variable effect) corresponding to the variable display of is executed, it is more difficult to win the mode update lottery, and it is difficult to execute the SP / SPSP reach effect that results in a loss. In the latter case, it is more difficult to satisfy the condition for updating the production mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is likely to be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the specific game state is more than the case where the variable performance (first variable performance) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the specific game state. When the (second variable effect) is executed, it is easier to win the mode update lottery, and the SP/SPSP ready-to-win effect in which the result is lost is more likely to be executed. Update conditions are easily established. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the production modes A to C, the display mode of the first reserved icon is the same, but by making the display mode of the first reserved icon different for each production mode, there are three types of display modes in the normal game state. may cause the first pending icon to be displayed. In addition, the display mode of the second pending icon is the same in the production modes D to G, but by making the display mode of the second pending icon different in the production modes D to E and the production modes F to G, the specified The second pending icon may be displayed in two different display modes in the gaming state.

In addition, the production mode (background image, display mode of production patterns, BGM, etc.) is updated according to the progress of the game. The player may be able to change the production mode (background image, display mode of the production pattern, BGM, etc.). In addition, if the production mode change operation is performed during the variable production, the production mode may be changed at the time when the change operation is performed, or the production mode may be changed at the time when the variable production being executed is completed. The mode may be changed, or the performance mode may be changed when the next variable performance starts.

For example, in the normal game state, when the change operation of the production mode is performed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation production), the next execution is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (second Even if it is variable production), the production mode (background image, display mode of production pattern, BGM, etc.) is changed. Also, in the normal game state, when the change operation of the production mode is performed during the second special symbol variation display (second variation effect), the next execution is the first special symbol variation display (first Change the production mode even if it is a variable production). By doing so, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player with respect to the change of the production mode (the production element used for the variable production), and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in the specific game state, if the change operation of the production mode is performed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation production), the next execution is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (second Even if it is variable production), the production mode (background image, display mode of production pattern, BGM, etc.) is changed. Also, in the specific game state, when the change operation of the production mode is performed during the second special symbol variation display (second variation effect), the next execution is the first special symbol variation display (first Change the production mode even if it is a variable production). By doing so, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player with respect to the change of the production mode (the production element used for the variable production), and to improve the interest of the game.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if received, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. and end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, a process of outputting a signal such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150 is performed.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting effect processing of the effect control unit)
The customer waiting effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E300-1. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, in step E300-2, until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect. selects the demonstration waiting time determination table (see FIG. 23) for determining the waiting time of Details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demonstration standby time and sets the demonstration standby timer. Specifically, referring to the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 23, one demonstration standby time is determined from a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration is on standby. Specifically, it is determined whether the demonstration standby timer is set. If it is not on standby for a demonstration, the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not executed, and if it is on standby for a demonstration, the demonstration standby timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not equal to 0, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not yet executed, and the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the present customer waiting effect processing is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demonstration waiting time determination table)
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

The game state, the current state, and the selected demo waiting time are associated with each other in the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. There are 4 types of demo standby time from 30 seconds to 80 seconds for the normal game mode, and 4 types of demo standby time from 35 seconds to 85 seconds for the specific game mode. is set.

The first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on, and the performance symbols on the image display device immediately after the power is restored. Demonstration standby time after is displayed statically, demonstration standby time after the variable display of the production pattern is finished (variation time has passed) and the production design is statically displayed, and production design after the end of the customer waiting demo production is different from the demonstration standby time after is displayed still. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the variable display of the performance symbols ends (variation The point is that the demonstration standby time after the time has passed and the production pattern is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the power supply is restored before the demonstration standby time after the variable display of the performance symbols is completed (the variation time has elapsed) and the performance symbols are statically displayed. The point is that the demonstration standby time after static display of the effect pattern on the image display device immediately after is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demo standby time after the design is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A fifth feature of the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the demonstration waiting time after the static display of the effect symbol is displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect is the shortest. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to the player, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

As a sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Prefetching effect processing of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 24, the look-ahead effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the effect mode of the icon change effect. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changes the display mode of the already displayed pending icon or the icon). Execute processing. The details of the icon change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs continuous announcement effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, the effect mode of the continuous announcement effect, and the like. The details of the continuous announcement effect determination process will be described later.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous announcement effect execution process for executing the continuous announcement effect determined to be executed in the continuous announcement effect determination process. The details of the continuous announcement effect determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process for executing a lamp change effect (lighting the winning entrance lamp NR so as to have a light emission mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed). Terminate the look-ahead effect processing. The details of the ramp change effect execution process will be described later.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E510-1. If the prefetch designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E510-2, and if the prefetch designation command has not been received, the current icon change effect determination process is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received pre-reading designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is during the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-7.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. Also, if the received prefetch designation command is based on the winning of the first starting port 45, the game state is normal, and the received prefetching designation command is based on the winning of the second start port 47. In the case, it may be provided that it is in a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E510-4, sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of an icon to be additionally displayed on first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-5. , selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 26) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. One icon final display mode is determined from among the icon final display modes.

In step E510-7, sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-9, and if it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 24) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 24, a plurality of One change scenario is determined from among the change scenarios.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and selects the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the suspended icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

In the icon final display mode determination table, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected are associated with each other. The type of notification sound when the icon is generated for each type is described.

The final display mode of the icons includes a white icon as a normal icon, and a blue icon and a red icon as special icons that make people expect that a jackpot game will be played (indicating that a jackpot game may be played). , and rainbow icons are set.

The degree of expectation for winning a big win related to the special icon increases in the order of (white icon<) blue icon<red icon<rainbow icon, and the rainbow icon is an icon that confirms a big win.

Then, when the white icon is displayed on the image display device, the first generated notification sound is output, when the blue icon is displayed, the second generated notification sound is output, and when the red icon is displayed, , the third generated notification sound is output, and when the rainbow icon is displayed, the fourth generated notification sound is output.

In addition, when the game ball wins in the first start port 45 in the normal game state, according to the display mode at the start of the display of the first pending icon based on the winning, any of the first to fourth generated notification sounds However, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 47 in the normal game state, none of the first to fourth generated notification sounds are output.

Further, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 in the specific game state, according to the display mode at the start of display of the second pending icon based on the winning, any of the second to fourth generated notification sounds is output (in the case of a white icon, the first generated notification sound is not output). None of the four generated notification sounds are output.

Here, the first feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 26 is that the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the scheduled variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in reach. It seems to be Therefore, the player's expectation can be heightened by the display mode of the pending icon, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, as a second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. One of the points is that when the game ball wins at 45, the notification sound is more likely to be output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the first start hole 45 than in the specific game state in which the player hits to the right, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Also, as a third feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. One of the points is that when the game ball wins at 47, the notification sound is more likely to be output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the specific game state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second starting hole 47, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 26, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the final icon display mode in the case of a big win, but it may be selected. .

In addition, although different notification sounds were set for a plurality of icon display modes (4 types), the notification sound generated when a white icon was generated, and changed to a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon. Alternatively, the notification sound may not be output when the white icon is generated, and the notification sound may be output only when the icon changes in any manner. Also, for the rainbow icon that is determined to be a big hit, a dedicated notification sound may be provided to provide three types.

In addition, instead of not outputting the notification sound when the game ball enters the second start port 47 in the normal game state, the notification sound is output at a lower rate than when the game ball enters the first start port 45. It may be output, and instead of not outputting the generated notification sound when the game ball wins in the first start port 45 in the specific game state, the game ball wins in the second start port 47. The notification sound may be output at a low rate.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

In the change scenario determination table, the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected are associated. The advance change in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the change are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the change (the icon change effect is executed). Scenarios (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed), and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation and during execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect are executed ) scenarios (for example, scenario 15, etc.) are set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, the scenario in which the display mode of the icon is changed is determined regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win effect (it may be a ready-to-reach effect other than the normal reach effect) is executed in the advance change. However, the display mode of the icon is changed according to a change scenario determination table in which whether or not a ready-to-win effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in advance fluctuation is executed is a determination factor. You may make it determine the scenario to which it makes. When such a change scenario determination table is used, there is no change in the display mode of the icon during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. It is preferable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, a change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the change in the display mode of the icon occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the advance variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing icon change effect execution processing in the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110 in step E520-1. When the special figure variation pattern specification command is received, the process is moved to step E520-2, and when the special figure variation pattern specification command is not received, the current icon change effect execution processing is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Determine whether there is an icon. If there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-4, and if there is no pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, sub CPU 130a selects the change pattern determination table for pending icon (see FIG. 29) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the pending icon to be changed. The details of the pending icon change pattern determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, referring to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. , determines one pending icon change pattern.

In step E520-6, sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage of the change timing. The display mode of the on-hold icon is changed, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) of the icon is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the scenario of the icon is stored, the process proceeds to step E520-8, and if the scenario of the icon is not stored, the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-8, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process proceeds to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects from among a plurality of change pattern determination tables for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed, the A change pattern determination table (see FIG. 30) for the icon is selected according to the change stage in which the icon changes. Details of the change pattern determination table for the icon corresponding to the change stage will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon shown in FIG. One icon change pattern is determined from the plurality of icon change patterns.

In step E520-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect execution process. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage of the change timing. The display mode of the icon that is displayed changes, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a pending icon change pattern determination table referred to when determining a pending icon change pattern.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the mode of pending icon change in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the pending icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the pending icon change effect generation timing and change stages in each pending icon change pattern are described.

As for the hold icon change pattern, normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shift-displayed (at the start of fluctuation) in response to the disappearance of the icon. , a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while fluctuating with the output of a sound effect, and when a character appears, an action effect that acts on the icon is performed with the character as the starting point, and the icon is displayed. A character effect change pattern 01 in which the mode changes and a change notification pattern indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the variable effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and an effect effect acting on the reserved icon starting from the change notification pattern. is set to change the display mode of the pending icon.

The change effect generation timing of the pending icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect, and when the variable effect is started (at the start of the variable effect), during the execution of the variable effect (during fluctuation), and the effect pattern When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

In the stage of change of the pending icon, there is a 1UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, or a change from a blue icon to a red icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot changes to a display mode one level higher, and a degree of expectation for winning a jackpot. 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon) is set to change the display mode to a two-step higher display mode.

Although the above-described three timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the pending icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon to be referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon. FIG. FIG. 30B is a table to be referred to when changing the display mode of the icon by two stages.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of change of the icon in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change patterns include a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes at the start of fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes during fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. There are set a change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 in which when a character appears, an action effect acting on the icon is performed with the character as a starting point, and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the state of progress of the change effect. When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the icon includes a 1UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, a change from a blue icon to a red icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is changed to a display mode one step higher, and a degree of expectation for winning a jackpot. 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon, a change from a blue icon to a rainbow icon, etc.) is set to change the display mode two steps higher.

Although the pattern effect change pattern 01 is not selected in the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, it may be selected. For example, in the variation effect for performing the pseudo-continuous effect, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo continuous effect" is a variable display of the effect pattern as if it were multiple times for the big hit determination based on the winning (entering the ball) to the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) once. In order to make it look as if it was executed, all within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (entering the ball) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) It is a variable display of a special effect design in which a re-variation display for starting a change again after the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or a plurality of times. In addition, a flame effect is displayed around the performance pattern 70a at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, and the color of the flame effect changes in the order of blue to red each time the temporary stop and re-fluctuation are repeated.

Although the above-mentioned two timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Continuous notice effect determination processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing continuous announcement effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E530-1. When the prefetching designation command is received, the processing is shifted to step E530-2, and when the prefetching designation command is not received, the current continuous announcement effect determination processing is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is the period during which the continuous announcement effect can be executed. If it is the execution period of the continuous notice effect (prefetching action effect, prefetch effect effect, prefetch vibration effect, prefetch zone effect, prefetch chance effect), the process is shifted to step E530-4, and the continuous notice effect can be executed. If it is not the period, the process proceeds to step E530-18 assuming that the continuous announcement effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed.

In the "predictive action effect", a special game is executed by executing an actuation effect (announcement effect) for operating the second movable member 74 in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of the variable effect in one or more variable effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation to be.

"Look-ahead effect production" is an effect production (advance production) in which an effect image of a predetermined color is displayed around the production pattern 70a at the timing (during the preparation operation, before scrolling) immediately after the start of the fluctuation production in one or more fluctuation productions. ) is executed to intermittently suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed.

"Forecast vibration effect" is the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing a vibration effect (announcement effect) in which the effect button 17 is vibrated in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of the variable effect in one or more variable effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests.

"Forecast zone effect" is the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing a zone effect (advance effect) that displays a zone image (zone background image) from a predetermined timing in one or more variable effects. It is a production that continuously suggests.

The ``predictive chance effect'' is an effect that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by stopping and displaying the effect symbols 70a in an arrangement with a predetermined regularity in one or a plurality of variable effects. It's becoming

The ``executable period of the continuous notice effect'' means that there is no precedent reservation in which the continuous notice effect is executed, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the prefetch designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received. In that case, it is a normal game state, and when a prefetch designation command based on the winning to the second start port 47 is received, it is a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) etc. mentioned.

The sub CPU 130a selects the continuous announcement type determination table (see FIGS. 32 and 33) corresponding to the current effect mode in step E530-4, and refers to the continuous announcement type determination table in step E530-5. A notice type (whether or not to execute a continuous notice effect, the type of the continuous notice effect to be executed) is determined. Details of the continuous announcement type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is the continuous announcement type for executing the continuous announcement effect. If the continuous announcement effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-18, and if the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, in step E530-7, a continuous announcement scenario determination table (Fig. 34 , see FIG. 35). Details of the continuous announcement scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead action rendering has been determined. If the look-ahead action effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-10, and if the look-ahead action effect is to be executed, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to in step E530-9, and the prediction scenario of the look-ahead action effect is determined. is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-10 whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead effect rendering has been determined. If the look-ahead effect rendering is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-12, and if the look-ahead effect rendering is to be executed, in step E530-11, the continuous announcement scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario for the look-ahead effect rendering is determined. is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the anticipatory vibration effect has been determined. If the pre-reading vibration effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-14, and if the pre-reading vibration effect is to be executed, in step E530-13, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to and the pre-reading vibration effect notice scenario is determined. is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-14 whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead zone effect has been determined. If the look-ahead zone effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-16, and if the look-ahead zone effect is to be executed, in step E530-15, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to, and the fore-ahead scenario of the look-ahead zone effect is determined. is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead chance effect has been determined. If the look-ahead chance effect is not to be executed, the current continuous notice effect determination processing is terminated, and if the look-ahead chance effect is to be executed, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to in step E530-17 to determine the look-ahead chance. The notice scenario of eye effect is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current continuous notice effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E530-18, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-notice scenario of the continuous announcement effect (notice scenario indicating that the continuous announcement effect is not executed), sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and sets the current continuous announcement effect. End decision processing.

The advance notice scenario or non-advanced scenario set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to in the continuous notice effect execution processing of step E540 described above, and the processing for executing the continuous notice effect or the continuous notice effect is executed. A process will be performed to prevent this.

Thus, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. The second movable member 74 operates (operates) more when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed. It's getting easier. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to enhance the production effect related to the variable display (variation production) of the first special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, in the normal game state, in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect), the foreseeing effect effect (the effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a) While the performance to be performed) can be executed, if it is in the specific game state, the look-ahead effect performance is not executed in the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation performance), so the fluctuation of the first special symbol during the normal game state. The ratio of executing the look-ahead effect production is different between when the display (first fluctuation production) is executed and when the fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) of the first special symbol is executed during the specific game state. It's like Therefore, it is possible to make a difference in the performance effect at the start of the first variable performance between the normal game state and the specific game state, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. effect) is not executed, while the second special symbol variation display (second variation effect) can execute the look-ahead effect effect, so the first special symbol variation display (first The ratio of execution of the look-ahead effect production is different between the case where the fluctuation production is executed and the case where the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (second fluctuation production) is executed during the specific game state. there is Therefore, during the specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that, when the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation performance) is executed in the specific game state, the look-ahead effect performance may be executed, and in this case, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. It is preferable to make the ratio lower than when the (second variation effect) is executed.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. Vibration performance is more likely to be executed when the variable display (variation performance) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variation performance) of the special symbol is executed. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to enhance the production effect related to the variable display (variation production) of the first special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. The second movable member 74 is easier to operate (operate) when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol is executed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. Vibration performance is more likely to be executed when the second special symbol variable display (variable performance) is executed than when the special symbol variable display (variable performance) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. If it is in the specific game state, the look-ahead zone effect (background change) is not executed in the variable display (first variable effect) of the first special symbol, so the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is not executed during the normal game state. Execution of the look-ahead zone performance (change of background) is more difficult when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed during the specific game state than when is executed. Therefore, during the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. Since the look-ahead zone effect can be executed in the variable display of special symbols (second variable effect), compared to the case where the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed during the specific game state, The look-ahead zone effect (background change) is more likely to be executed when the second special symbol variable display (second variable effect) is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, during the specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that, in the specific game state, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed, the look-ahead zone effect may be executed, and in this case, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. It is preferable to make the ratio lower than when the (second variation effect) is executed.

According to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. Since the look-ahead chance eye effect is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect), than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed during the specific game state, When the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed during the normal game state, the look-ahead chance effect is more likely to be executed. Therefore, during the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. Since it is possible to execute the look-ahead chance eye production in the variable display (second variable production), the specific game is faster than the case where the first special symbol variable display (first variable production) is executed during the specific game state. When the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is executed during the state, the look-ahead chance effect is more likely to be executed. Therefore, during the specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is executed in the specific game state, the look-ahead chance effect may be executed, and in this case, the second special symbol is changed. It is preferable to set the ratio to be lower than when the display (second variable effect) is executed.

(Continuous notice type determination table)
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a continuous notice type determination table referred to for determining the continuous notice type in production modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. ) is a diagram showing a continuous announcement effect determination table referred to in order to determine the continuous announcement type.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the continuous announcement type determination table is associated with the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each continuous announcement type, and the selected continuous announcement type. , The continuous notice type includes "non-execution" that does not execute the continuous notice effect, "prefetching action effect", "prefetching effect effect", and "prefetching vibration effect" that executes one of a plurality of types of continuous notice effects. , "Look-ahead zone effect", "Look-ahead chance eye effect", and "Look-ahead effect effect & look-ahead vibration effect", "Look-ahead action effect & look-ahead zone effect" are provided. It is

For example, when the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) in the production modes A to C (normal game state) is a loss and the SP reach production is executed, 79% "non-execution" is determined, 6 % decides "look-ahead effect effect", 5% decides "look-ahead chance effect", 4% decides "look-ahead action effect", 3% decides "look-ahead vibration effect", 2% The "prefetching zone effect" is determined at , and the "prefetching effect effect & prefetching vibration effect" is determined at 1%.

(Consecutive notice production scenario decision table)
FIG. 34 shows a continuous announcement scenario determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. 35 shows a continuous announcement scenario determination table for production modes D to G (specific game state). It is a diagram.

In the continuous notice scenario decision table, the number of reserved special symbols, the prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the notice scenario to be selected are associated. The prior fluctuations (before 4 fluctuations, before 3 fluctuations, before 2 fluctuations, before 1 fluctuation), and the production mode of the continuous advance notice production in the fluctuations are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

The “weak notice” has different effects depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of the look-ahead action effect, the second movable member 74 performs a weak action by emitting light in blue, and a weak action effect sound is output. In the case of the look-ahead effect production, a blue effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and the blue effect sound is output. In the case of the look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating 17 weakly vibrates for one second, and the production button 17 blinks in white, and in the case of the look-ahead zone production, a blue zone image (zone background image) is displayed, A zone effect sound is output, and in the case of the look-ahead chance effect, the effect symbols 70a are stop-displayed in a predetermined arrangement of even-numbered symbols (for example, "224", "668", etc.).

The "strong notice" has different effects depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of the look-ahead action effect, the second movable member 74 performs a strong action by emitting red light, and a strong action effect sound is output. In the case of the look-ahead effect production, a red effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and the red effect sound is output.In the case of the look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating 17 strongly vibrates for only 3 seconds, and the effect button 17 flashes red. In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a red heat zone image (zone background image) is displayed. , the heat zone effect sound is output, and in the case of the look-ahead chance effect, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in a predetermined arrangement of odd-numbered symbols (for example, "335", "779", etc.). be.

The continuous notice production scenario includes a scenario in which a weak notice and a strong notice are not executed during the advance change and a weak notice or a strong notice is executed during the change (for example, scenario 11), and a scenario during the change and the change. A scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak notice or a strong notice is executed is set therein.

As a first feature of the various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. However, there is a point that the expectation of the jackpot is high. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, production modes D to G (specific game state) are more The point is that the continuous advance notice effect is likely to be executed (the execution ratio is high), that is, the degree of expectation for the big win is low when the continuous notice effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

Instead of differentiating the execution ratio of the continuous announcement effect between the production modes A to C and the production modes D to G, for example, the continuous announcement production is executed more in the production mode B than in the production mode A. For example, the performance mode E may make it easier to execute the continuous announcement performance than the performance mode D. For example, the execution ratio of the continuous announcement effect may be changed between the effect modes D to G. By doing so, the degree of expectation for the big win of the continuous advance notice effect changes between the effect modes, so it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Also, in the production mode D to G (specific game state), if the normal reach production is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result), the continuous notice production (here, look-ahead effect production, look-ahead chance production, look-ahead operation production ) is easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the (super) shortened fluctuation tends to be more frequent than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

As a fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Than, in production mode D ~ G (specific game state), if the SP reach production is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result), continuous notice production (here look-ahead effect production, look-ahead chance eye production, look-ahead Action effect, look-ahead zone effect) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the (super) shortened fluctuation tends to be more frequent than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

As a fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Than, in production mode D ~ G (specific game state), if the SPSP reach production is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result), continuous notice production (here look-ahead effect production, look-ahead chance eye production, look-ahead Action effect, look-ahead zone effect) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state, which tends to have more super-shortening fluctuations than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As the sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), the full rotation ready-to-win effect is scheduled to be executed (forecast result). In the production mode D ~ G (specific game state) than the case, continuous notice production (here, look-ahead operation production, look-ahead zone production) in the case where all rotation reach production is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result) is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state, which tends to have more super-shortening fluctuations than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As the seventh feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, production modes A to C (normal game state) are more Prefetching vibration production (vibration production not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 or the display of the operation promotion image) is likely to be executed (high execution ratio = different degree of expectation for big win). Therefore, in the performance modes A to C (normal game state) in which the stay period is likely to be longer than in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), the player can easily experience the anticipatory vibration performance, thereby making the game interesting. can be improved. In addition, in production modes D to G (specific game states), in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in production modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to add rarity to the anticipatory vibration effects, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

Note that the performance modes D to G may be easier to execute the look-ahead vibration performance (execution rate may be higher) than the performance modes A to C. In addition, in the normal game state, the performance mode A makes it easier to execute the look-ahead continuous performance than the performance mode B or C, so that the execution ratio of the look-ahead vibration performance is increased between the performance modes A to C. It may be different, and if it is a specific game state, it is easier to execute the anticipation vibration effect in the effect mode D than in the effect mode E to G, so that the anticipation vibration is performed between the effect modes D to G. You may vary the execution ratio of production|presentation. By doing so, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for a big win when the anticipatory vibration effect is executed between the effect modes, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, specific reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects ) is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result), in production modes D to G (specific game state), a specific reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is scheduled to be executed ( A look-ahead result) is more difficult to execute the look-ahead vibration effect (execution rate is low). Therefore, in production modes D to G (specific game state), where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in production modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to make the look-ahead vibration effect rarer and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

As the ninth feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, production modes D to G (specific game state) are more One of the points is that the look-ahead action effect is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, in production modes D to G (specific game state), where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in production modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to make the look-ahead vibration effect rarer and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

As a tenth feature of various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, when the continuous notice effect that ends with one fluctuation effect is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) Than, when the continuous notice effect that ends with one fluctuation effect in the effect mode D to G (specific game state) is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect , SP reach effect, SP SP reach effect) are difficult to execute (performed rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eleventh feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, when continuous notice effects that end with two fluctuation effects are executed in production modes D to G (specific game state) Than, when the continuous notice effect that ends with two fluctuation effects in production modes A to C (normal game state) is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect , SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a twelfth feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. In production modes D to G (specific game state), the continuous notice effect of only one variable effect is performed than when the continuous notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in modes A to C (normal game state). When it is executed, the ready-to-win effect (normal ready-to-win effect, SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect) is less likely to be executed in the variable effect that is the target of the announcement of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirteenth feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. , In production modes A to C (normal game state), when the continuous notice effect over 3 times of fluctuation effects is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect) , SPSP ready-to-win effects) are likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 14th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, in the production modes A to C (normal game state) , In the production mode D ~ G (specific game state), when the continuous notice effect over three times of the fluctuation effect is executed, the reach effect with high expectations for the big hit in the fluctuation effect that is the target of the notice of the continuous notice effect (for example , SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the fifteenth feature of various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. (Second movable member 74) can be used to execute the look-ahead action effect, but the look-ahead action effect can be performed in production modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state). There is a difference in the degree of expectation of the jackpot when executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 16th feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. In this case, the ratio (100%) of operating the second movable member 74, which is not used in the final effect, is higher than the ratio (0%) of operating the first movable member 73, which is used in the final effect, which will be described later. is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that a big win has occurred just because the look-ahead action effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the first movable member 73 may be operated instead of the second movable member 74 in the strong advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect. Even in this case, when executing the look-ahead action effect in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the ratio of operating the first movable member 73 , the ratio of operating the second movable member 74 should be higher.

As the 17th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. In this case, the ratio (0%) of the production button 17 in the normal state is higher than the ratio (0%) of the production button 17 in the protruded state. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the effect button 17 projecting (projecting only in a decided effect, which will be described later), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the strong notice of the anticipatory vibration effect, the effect button 17 may be vibrated in a protruding state instead of being vibrated in the normal state. Even in this case, when executing the look-ahead vibration effect in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the ratio of the effect button 17 to the projecting state , the ratio of the normal state should be higher.

As the eighteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. high-speed fluctuation period), a weak notice of the look-ahead action production (weak action of the first movable member 73 + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the look-ahead effect production (display of a blue effect image around the production pattern 70a) are executed. The degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect (weak vibration of the effect button 17 for 1 second) executed without displaying the operation promotion image is executed than when the operation prompting image is displayed. is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that the player can operate, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a nineteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. During the high-speed fluctuation period), strong notice of the look-ahead action production (strong action of the first movable member 73 + red light emission) and strong notice of the look-ahead effect production (display of a red effect image around the production pattern 70a) are executed. When the strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect (strong vibration of the effect button 17 for 3 seconds) is executed, the expectation of the big win is higher than when the game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that the player can operate, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice effect execution processing of effect control unit)
The continuous announcement effect execution processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing continuous advance notice effect execution processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110 in step E540-1. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process is moved to step E540-2, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current continuous notice performance execution processing is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the announcement scenario of the continuous announcement effects (prefetching action effect, prefetch effect effect, prefetch vibration effect, prefetch zone effect) stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. At E540-3, it is determined whether or not the advance notice scenario of the continuous advance notice effect is stored. If the advance notice scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E540-4, and if the advance notice scenario is not stored, the current continuous advance notice effect execution process is terminated.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines the notice pattern (type of continuous notice effect, weak notice, strong notice) to be executed in the current variable effect according to the notice scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Then, in step E540-5, a continuous announcement effect command corresponding to the determined announcement pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the continuous announcement effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the continuous announcement effect corresponding to the determined announcement pattern is executed. When this process ends, the current continuous announcement effect execution process ends.

(Lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change effect is to be executed. The scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to the power recovery or the command at the time of winning that will be cleared (special figure hold number specification command, look-ahead specification command) cannot be received normally. transfer processing.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is time to change the icon. If it is the icon change timing, the process proceeds to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the prize winning entrance lamp NR corresponding to the color change of the icon. It will be.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. When the ramp changing flag is set, the current ramp changing effect execution processing is terminated, and when the ramp changing flag is not set, the ramp changing flag is set and the ramp changing effect is executed this time. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current ramp change effect execution process is terminated.

At step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, at step E550-8 sets a ramp effect end command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current ramp change effect execution process. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect being executed is terminated.

As described above, according to the lamp change effect execution processing shown in FIG. It is designed to perform a performance. Therefore, synergistic effect with the icon change effect can enhance the performance effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution processing shown in FIG. 37, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous advance notice effect, even if the power is restored during the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed again. It is designed not to. Therefore, it is possible to secure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when power restoration occurs like the icon change production, the lamp change production may be executed again in the fluctuation production started after the power is restored. In this case, it is preferable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that starts after the power is restored.

Further, instead of executing the lamp change performance corresponding to the icon change performance, the final light emission mode of the winning entrance lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the previous change to the relevant change, etc. are determined by lottery, and the lamp change performance is executed. You may do so.

(Variation production pattern determination processing of production control unit)
Fluctuation effect pattern determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process is executed in the above-described special figure special electric effect process.

First, in step E610-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E610-2 selects a variation pattern determination table (FIGS. 39 and 40) corresponding to the current presentation mode. . The details of the variation effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E610-3, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from a plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E610-4, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Variation production pattern judgment table)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table for the effect modes A to C referred to for determining the variable effect pattern in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. It is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table for the effect modes D~G (specific game state) referred to in order to determine the variable effect pattern in D~G.

As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the variable effect pattern determination table is associated with a special figure variable pattern designation command, a selection rate (%) of each variable effect pattern, and a selected variable effect pattern. , the effect configuration in each variable effect pattern is described.

"Variation" in the column of effect configuration indicates that the normal variable display is executed in which the ready-to-win state by the effect pattern 70a is not formed.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation display is performed in which the reach state is not formed for a shorter period of time than the normal variation display.
"L fluctuation" indicates that the long fluctuation display is executed in which the reach state is not formed for a longer time than the normal fluctuation display.

"Pseudo-failure" means that after temporarily stopping the effect symbol 70a during one time of variable display of the special symbol, the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed or not. It shows that a pseudo consecutive failure effect is executed as a result of not being performed.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that after performing an effect inciting whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed, the pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of the pseudo-continuous effect being performed.
“(Variation → Pseudo-success) x 2” is an effect in which a pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of performing a pseudo-continuous effect after performing a stimulating effect to incite whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. is set as one set, and two sets of the effect are performed.
“(Variation → Pseudo-success) x 3” is an effect in which a pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of performing a pseudo-continuous effect after performing a stimulating effect to incite whether or not a pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed. is set as one set, and three sets of the effect are performed.

"N reach" indicates that the above-described normal reach effect is executed.
“N “7” ready-to-win” indicates that the above-described normal ready-to-win effect is executed in a state where the ready-to-win state is formed by the effect symbol 70a of “7”.
"SP reach" indicates that the above-described SP reach effect is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-described special SP reach effect is executed.
"SPSP ready-to-win" indicates that the above-described SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the above-described full rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP ready-to-win effect will be executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SPSP ready-to-win effect will be executed.
“Full spin development” indicates that a development effect suggesting full spin reach is executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in effects with different degrees of expectation for big wins is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period.
"Decision" indicates that a decision effect suggesting whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the elapse of the effective period.
"Failure" indicates that a determined failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed as a result of the determined effect.
"Success" indicates that a determined success effect suggesting that a jackpot game is performed is executed as a result of the determined effect.

"Loss" means to temporarily stop by forming a losing dot (a mode of displaying a losing dot such as "358" or "948" different from the initial dot to be described later) by means of the production pattern 70a which is composed only of numbers and does not include characters. is shown.
"c symbol loss" means that the performance symbol 70a of the display mode including the character forms a losing dot (a false display mode such as "358" or "948" different from the initial dot to be described later) and temporarily stops. It is shown that.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect (stop-suggesting effect) is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped is displayed on the image display device.
"Pattern match" means that the game is temporarily stopped after forming a big hit result (a big hit display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a which does not include characters but only numbers.
"c pattern match" indicates that the game is temporarily stopped after forming a big hit result (big win display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a of the display mode including characters.

"Re-lottery" refers to whether or not the effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the jackpot appearance (jackpot display mode) becomes a jackpot appearance that is advantageous to the player (from the even-numbered production pattern that usually becomes a jackpot to a definite variable jackpot). (whether or not it becomes an odd-numbered performance symbol, or whether or not it becomes a “7” performance symbol for executing the most advantageous jackpot game), then promotion success performance is performed as an advantageous jackpot outcome. , indicates that a re-lottery effect is executed such as a promotion failure effect that does not result in an advantageous jackpot.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 4 seconds.
“Strong vibration for 1 second” indicates that a strong vibration effect (big win confirmation vibration effect) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second.

In the fluctuation production pattern determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state) shown in FIG. In this case, the ratio of the ready-to-win effect performed with the even-numbered effect pattern 70a is 70%, and the ratio of the ready-to-win effect performed with the odd-numbered effect pattern 70a other than "7" is 30%.
In the case of special pattern 00 (losing) and variable production patterns 07 to 11 (SP reach production or SPSP reach production), the ratio of reach production performed with even production pattern 70a is 65%, and odd numbers other than "7" 30% of the ready-to-win effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7", and 5% of the ready-to-win effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7".

In the case of the special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and variable production patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of the ready-to-win production with the even production pattern 70a is 100%. .
In the case of special pattern 02 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 18 to 19 (SP reach production), the ratio of reach production performed with even number production pattern 70a is 60%, and odd production patterns other than "7". The ratio of the ready-to-win effect being performed in 70a is 40%.

In the case of the special pattern 02 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 20 to 22 (SPSP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to be performed with the even number production pattern 70a is 6%, and the odd number production patterns other than "7". 4% of the ready-to-win production is performed in 70a, and 90% of the ready-to-win production is performed in the effect pattern 70a of "7".
In the case of special pattern 03 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of reach production to be performed with even production pattern 70a is 60%, "7 , the rate of the ready-to-win effect being performed with the odd-numbered effect pattern 70a other than "" is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 10 (losing) and variable effect patterns 26-27 (special SP ready-to-win effect), the ratio of ready-to-win effect to even-numbered effect pattern 70a is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 04 (normal jackpot) & 05 (probability variable jackpot) and variable performance pattern 27 (special SP ready-to-win performance), the ratio of ready-to-win performance with even-numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%.

In the variable performance pattern determination table for the performance modes D to G (specific game state) shown in FIG. The rate at which the reach effect is performed is 100%.
In the case of special patterns 01 (normal jackpot), 02 (probability variation jackpot), 03 (probability variation jackpot) and variable production pattern 33 (special SP reach production), the proportion of reach production performed with even production pattern 70a is 100%. It has become.

In the case of the special pattern 10 (losing) and the variable production pattern 36 (normal reach production), 38 to 42 (SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to the even number production pattern 70a is 60%. The proportion of the ready-to-win effect performed with the odd-numbered effect pattern 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of the special symbol 04 (normal jackpot) and the fluctuation production patterns 43 to 48 (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to the even number production pattern 70a is 100%. .

In the case of special pattern 05 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 49 to 50 (SP reach production), the ratio of reach production to be performed with even production pattern 70a is 60%, and odd production patterns other than "7". The ratio of the ready-to-win effect being performed in 70a is 40%.
In the case of special pattern 05 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 51 to 53 (SPSP ready-to-win production), the ratio of reach production to be performed with even-numbered production pattern 70a is 3%, and odd-numbered production patterns other than "7". The ratio of the ready-to-win effect is performed with 70a is 2%, and the ratio of the ready-to-win effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 95%.
In the case of a special pattern 05 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 54 to 55 (full rotation reach production), the ratio of reach production performed with even number production pattern 70a is 20%, and odd number production other than "7". The proportion of the ready-to-win effect being performed with the pattern 70a is 30%, and the proportion of the ready-to-win effect being performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 50%.

The first feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that when the SP ready-to-win production (excluding the special SP ready-to-win production) or the SPSP ready-to-win production is executed, the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed. The point is that an eye-catching effect suggesting that is executed and the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the change of the display mode of the production pattern 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the production pattern 70a will be stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The second feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that when a big win is achieved, there is a variable performance pattern in which a successful performance is executed and the symbols are aligned, and a successful determination after the symbols are aligned. The point is that there is a variable effect pattern in which the effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the case of a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that, in the variable performance pattern that results in a big hit, the performance button 17 is pressed for 4 seconds when the performance symbols 70a that do not include characters are aligned. The point is that a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) that strongly vibrates is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, when the production pattern 70a including the character is pattern-matched (c pattern-matched), the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second. Production (jackpot confirmation vibration production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, a reach production (normal reach The ratio of the ready-to-win production with the even-numbered production pattern 70a (the production pattern that usually becomes a big hit by becoming a big hit) is higher than the ratio of the production, SP ready-to-win production, and SPSP ready-to-win production. mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7" results in a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a sixth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The ratio of reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is lower in the production pattern 70a of "7" (the production pattern that becomes the most advantageous probability variation jackpot by becoming a jackpot). mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the performance pattern 70a of "7" results in a big win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the seventh feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, a reach production (normal reach Reach production (normal reach production, SP One of the points is that the ratio of reach production, SPSP reach production) to be performed is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the performance symbol 70a of "7" results in a big win, and to improve the interest of the game.

As an eighth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. When the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a, the expectation for the big hit is higher. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player as to which kind of effect pattern the ready-to-win effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, production modes D to G (specific game state) are most advantageous than production modes A to C (normal game state). In the case of a variable probability big win, the ready-to-win performance (SPSP ready-to-win performance) is likely to be executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7" (the most advantageous performance symbol to become the most advantageous variable probability big hit by becoming a big win). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), and to improve the interest of the game.

As a tenth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), even if the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect pattern 70a of "7", the jackpot is confirmed. However, in the production modes D to G (specific game state), when the ready-to-win production is executed with the production pattern 70a of "7", the jackpot is determined. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), and to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that in production modes A to C (normal game state), eye-catching production ( While the stop suggestive effect) can be executed, in the production modes D to G (specific game state), the eye-catching effect (stop suggestive effect) is not executed in the first variable effect, so the first variable effect is performed during the normal game state. When (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed and when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, an eye-catching performance (stop suggesting performance) are executed at different rates. Therefore, it is possible to provide a difference in the performance effect of the first variable performance between the normal game state and the specific game state, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twelfth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, in production modes D to G (specific game state), when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed , the eye-catching effect (stop suggesting effect) is not executed, while the eye-catching effect (stop suggesting effect) can be executed when the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed. Therefore, when the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state and when the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state, the ratio of executing the eye-catching effect (stop suggesting effect) is different. It's like Therefore, during the specific game state in which the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the second variable performance can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved. .

As a thirteenth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, in production modes A to C (normal game state), when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed In, while it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous fanning effect and a pseudo-continuous effect (a effect in which a flame effect is displayed around the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a), in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the second When the 1st variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, the pseudo-continuous stimulus effect and the pseudo-continuous effect are not executed. The rate at which the pseudo-continuous fanning effect and the pseudo-continuous effect are executed is different between when the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a difference in the performance effect of the first variable performance between the normal game state and the specific game state, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the 14th feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, in production modes D to G (specific game state), when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed , the pseudo-continuous fanning effect and the pseudo-continuous effect (effect of displaying the flame effect around the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a) are not executed, while the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. In this case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous stimulus effect and a pseudo-continuous effect, so that the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state and the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state. The rate at which the pseudo-continuation effect and the pseudo-continuation effect are executed differs depending on the case. Therefore, during the specific game state in which the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the second variable performance can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved. .

As a fifteenth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, in production modes A to C (normal game state), when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed , while the determined effect (effective suggestive effect suggesting that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective) can be executed, the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. In this case, the determination effect (effective suggestion effect suggesting that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the sixteenth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, in production modes D to G (specific game state), when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed , while the determined production (effective suggestion production that suggests that the operation of the production button 17 may be effective) is not executed, the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed The point is that it is possible to execute a determined effect (effective suggesting effect suggesting that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the seventeenth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, in production modes A to C (normal game state), when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed In this case, the re-lottery effect is more likely to be executed than when the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighteenth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, in production modes D to G (specific game state), when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed The point is that the re-lottery effect is more likely to be executed when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

Although the ready-to-win performance is always executed in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, a variable performance pattern in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is executed may be provided.

Also, if you temporarily stop with a losing result after a cut-in production or a decision failure production, it will be confirmed that you will lose, but after the cut-in production or decision failure production, it will be a big hit. may be executed.

Further, when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state, the eye-catching performance (stop suggesting performance) may be executed. It is preferable to make the rate lower than when the variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed.

In addition, instead of executing only an eye-catching production as the stop suggesting production, the production pattern 70a is suggested to stop by executing a light-emitting effect production for displaying a light-emitting effect on the production pattern 70a when the C patterns are complete. In this case, when the first variable performance is executed in the specific game state, the light-emitting effect performance is not executed when the losing performance pattern is temporarily stopped, and the light-emitting effect performance is not executed when the big hit performance pattern is temporarily stopped. When the second variable performance is executed in the specific game state, when the losing performance pattern is temporarily stopped without performing the ready-to-win performance, the light-emitting effect performance is not performed, and the ready-to-win performance is performed to perform the losing performance pattern. When is temporarily stopped or the jackpot performance pattern is temporarily stopped, the lighting effect performance may be executed.

In addition, when the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state, a pseudo-continuous effect (effect of displaying a flame effect around the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a) is executed. In this case, the ratio should be lower than when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed.

(Timer effect determination process)
Next, the timer effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing timer effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E620-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the current variation effect pattern, and in step E620-2, executes a reach effect greater than the SP reach effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect). determine whether or not When the ready-to-win effect equal to or greater than the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, the processing is shifted to step E620-3.

In step E620-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the number of event timer effects (“0 times” to “2 times”) to be executed during the current variable effect using the event timer frequency determination table (see FIG. 42). do. Specifically, the big hit lottery result, variation effect pattern, etc., are collated with the event timer frequency determination table. The details of this event timer count determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

The event timer effect indicates the occurrence of any of a plurality of suggestive events (excluding icon changes) that make players expect that a jackpot game will be executed in the process of executing the variable effect, and the timing of the occurrence of the suggestive event. However, when the event timer production is executed, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of the suggested event, and when the suggested event occurs, it is possible to determine the type of the suggested event. there is

Suggestion events include normal ready-to-win effects, pseudo-runs, SP ready-to-win effects, SPSP ready-to-win effects, full-rotation ready-to-win effects, effective periods, jackpot pattern stoppages, and the like.

In step E620-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined number of times of the event timer effect is to execute the event timer effect. If the event timer effect is to be executed (the number of times of the event timer effect is "1 time" or "2 times"), the process moves to Step E620-5, and the event timer effect is not to be executed (event timer effect If the number of effects is "0"), the current timer effect determination process is terminated.

In step E620-5, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined number of event timer effects is one. If it is once, the process moves to step E620-6, and if it is twice instead of once, the process moves to step E620-9.

In step E620-6, the sub CPU 130a uses the suggested event determination table for one timer (see FIG. 43) to determine the suggested event suggested by the event timer effect and the timer type classified according to the type and length of the timer. to decide. Specifically, the variation performance pattern and the like are collated with the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer. The details of the suggested event determination table for one timer will be described later with reference to FIG.

The timer types include a short timer that is a short timer time category, a middle timer that is a long timer time category, and a long timer that is a long timer time category. Note that the timer times set according to the three types of timers are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

In step E620-7, sub CPU 130a determines the timer update pattern (drawing mode) in the event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 45). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, and the like are checked against the update pattern determination table. The details of this update pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E620-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a suggested event and a timer effect pattern command indicating an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect pattern command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

In step E620-9, the sub CPU 130a uses the first suggested event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 44(a)) to determine the suggested event suggested by the first event timer effect and the timer effect. Determines the timer type, which is classified by type and length. Specifically, the variation effect pattern and the like are collated with the first suggested event determination table for two timers. The details of the first suggested event determination table for two timers will be described later with reference to FIG. 44(a).

In step E620-10, the sub CPU 130a determines the timer update pattern (drawing mode) in the first event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 45). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, and the like are checked against the update pattern determination table. The details of this update pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E620-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a suggested event and a timer effect designation command indicating an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the timer effect specifying command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the first event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

In step E620-12, the sub CPU 130a uses the second suggested event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 44(b)) to determine the suggested event suggested by the second event timer effect and the timer. Determines the timer type classified by length. Specifically, the variation performance pattern and the like are collated with the second suggestive event determination table for two timers. The details of the second suggested event determination table for the second timer will be described later with reference to FIG. 44(b).

In step E620-13, the sub CPU 130a determines the timer update pattern (drawing mode) in the second event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 45). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, and the like are checked against the update pattern determination table. The details of this update pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E620-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a suggested event and a timer effect pattern command indicating an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and terminates the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the second event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

(Event timer count determination table)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an event timer count determination table referred to when determining the number of event timer effects to be executed during a variable effect. The event timer number determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, variable effect pattern, distribution ratio (%) for each number of event timer effects, and the determined number of event timer effects.

The number of times of the event timer effect is "0 times", which means that the event timer effect is not executed, "1 time", which means that the event timer effect is executed once, and the event timer effect is executed twice. Three types of "twice" are set.

The first feature of the event timer frequency determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the event timer performance is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the big win lottery result, and the likelihood of a big win is low. The point is that the event timer effect is more likely to be executed when the ready-to-win effect with a high expectation for big win is executed than when the effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the number of times the event timer effects are executed is more likely to occur in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the number of executions of the event timer effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the event timer frequency determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the number of times the performance is executed tends to increase. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the event timer frequency determination table shown in FIG. is executed, the timer effect (update effect) is less likely to be executed during the variable effect.

That is, when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, the reach production other than the special SP reach is executed, while the first variation production is executed during the specific game state. When (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, since the special SP reach performance is executed without executing the reach performance other than the special SP reach performance, the first variation that causes a loss during the normal game state. The timer effect (updated effect) is less likely to be executed when the first variable effect causing a loss is executed during the specific game state than when the effect is executed. By doing so, in the normal game state in which the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the first variation performance can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, the first variation effect (fluctuation of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit during the specific game state is more likely than the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big win is executed during the normal game state. display) is executed, the timer effect (update effect) is less likely to be executed. By doing so, in the normal game state in which the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the first variation performance can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game is improved. becomes possible.

Further, when the first variable performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the special SP ready-to-win performance is executed without executing the ready-to-win performance other than the special SP ready-to-win. When the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the reach performance other than the special SP reach is executed, so the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state. The timer effect (update effect) is more likely to be executed when the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state than when it is executed. In this way, during the specific game state in which the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the second variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game is improved. becomes possible.

Note that the timer effect is executed when the special SP ready-to-win effect is executed, but the timer effect may not be executed when the special SP ready-to-win effect is executed. In this case, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, and when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state If executed, the timer effect will not be executed.

(Suggestion event determination table for one timer)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a suggestive event when one event timer effect is executed during a variable effect, and a suggestive event determination table for one-time timer referred to when determining the timer type. The suggestive event determination table for one-time timer is associated with a variable effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestive event, a suggestive event to be determined, and a timer type.

Seven kinds of suggestive events are set: normal reach, pseudo-run, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, all-rotation reach performance, effective period, and jackpot symbol stop.

In addition, three timer types are set as timer types: a short timer that is a short timer time category, a middle timer that is a long timer time category, and a long timer that is a long timer time category. Note that the timer times set according to the three types of timers are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

A first feature of the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. 43 is that the types of suggested events are set differently according to the variable effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the suggested event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. 43, an event (for example, a pseudo Consecutive, normal reach) is more likely to be determined as a suggestive event than events (for example, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance, effective period, jackpot symbol stop) executed at a later time of variable performance. is mentioned. By doing so, the expectation of the player can be improved for a long period of time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a third feature of the suggested event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. Also, an event (for example, SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, all-rotation ready-to-win effect, effective period, jackpot pattern stop) executed at a later time of variable effect is more likely to be determined as a suggestion event. By doing so, the expectation of the player can be improved for a long period of time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The fourth feature of the suggested event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. The higher the degree, the easier it is for the long timer to be determined as the timer type). By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer effect is, the higher the expectation of the big win becomes, so that the player will have a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

As a fifth feature of the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. When an event timer effect that suggests the occurrence of a specific event (effective period) is executed, the effect button is pressed in the final stage (final stage) of the variable effect, rather than when the event timer effect that suggests the occurrence is executed. 17 is likely to be in a special state. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation as to which type of event is the suggestive event, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a sixth feature of the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. 43, the final phase of the variable effect is more pronounced when the middle timer is determined than when the short timer is determined as the timer type. The point is that the effect button 17 tends to be in a special state (protruding state) in (final stage). By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation regarding the length of the timer time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The seventh feature of the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. 43 is that the final phase of the variable effect ( The point is that the effect button 17 tends to be in a special state (protruding state) in the final stage). By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation regarding the length of the timer time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Suggestion event determination table for timer 2 times)
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a suggestive event when the event timer effect is executed twice during the variable effect, and a suggestive event determination table for two timers referred to when determining the timer type. The suggestive event determination table for two timers is associated with a variable effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestive event, a suggested event to be determined, and a timer type.

FIG. 44(a) is a diagram showing a first suggested event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the first suggested event and the type of the timer type, and FIG. ) is a diagram showing a second suggested event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the second suggested event and the type of timer type.

Seven kinds of suggestive events are set: normal reach, pseudo-run, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, effective period, all-rotation reach performance, and jackpot symbol stop.

In addition, three timer types are set as timer types: a short timer that is a short timer time category, a middle timer that is a long timer time category, and a long timer that is a long timer time category. Note that the timer times set according to the three types of timers are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

A first feature of the suggestive event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 44 is that the kind of suggested event is set differently according to the variable effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

Also, as a second feature of the suggested event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. One of the points is that both of the events that are executed at the late stage of the variable performance are likely to be determined as suggestive events. By doing so, the expectation of the player can be improved for a long period of time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as a third feature of the suggested event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 44, the timer type for which a longer timer time is set is more likely to be determined for a variable effect pattern with a higher expectation for a big win ( A long timer is more likely to be determined as a timer type as the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher). By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer effect is, the higher the expectation of the big win becomes, so that the player will have a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, as a fourth feature of the suggestive event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 44, a specific When the event timer effect suggesting the occurrence of the event (effective period) is executed, the effect button 17 is more likely to be in the special state in the final phase (final stage) of the variable effect. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation as to which type of event is the suggestive event, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fifth feature of the suggested event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. However, there is a point that the production button 17 tends to be in a special state (protruding state) in the final phase (final stage) of the variable production. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation regarding the length of the timer time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Update pattern determination table)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an update pattern determination table referred to when determining a timer update pattern (effect mode). The update pattern determination table is associated with the timer type, jackpot lottery result, distribution ratio (%) for each update pattern, and determined update pattern. The timer display position and whether or not the standby display indicating that the execution of the timer effect is waiting is described.

The “normal pattern” is a normal update pattern in which the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 is subtracted by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds.
The “special pattern” means that the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 is decremented by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds, and then the timer (number of seconds) is rewound. This is a special update pattern in which 1 is decremented by 1 until it reaches 0 seconds again.

The expected degree of jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the short timer is normal pattern 1<normal pattern 2<normal pattern 3.
The expected degree of jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the middle timer is normal pattern 11<normal pattern 12<normal pattern 13.
The expected degree of jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the long timer is normal pattern 21<normal pattern 22<normal pattern 23<normal pattern 24<normal pattern 25<special pattern 1<normal pattern 26<normal pattern 27<special pattern 2< A normal pattern 28 is provided.

In this way, in the timer effect, a plurality of timer times (update patterns) are set. effect, effective period of the effect button 17, stop display of the jackpot pattern, etc.) occurs, and the timing of the occurrence of a predetermined event, so any timer time (update pattern) , the count value is counted up to the final reaching point (0 second in this embodiment).

The first feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that regardless of the timer type, there is an update pattern in which the timer time is longer in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the big win lottery result. points that are easy to determine. By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer effect is, the higher the expectation of the big win becomes, so that the player will have a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

A second feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that even if the timer time is the same, the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the display mode (character color) of the timer. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the display mode of the timer, and to improve the amusement of the game. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big win related to the display mode (character color) of the timer is white<blue<red<rainbow (confirmed big win).

A third feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the timer type for which a longer timer time is determined has more timer display modes (character colors). By doing so, it is possible to give an impression that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher for a timer type in which a longer timer time is determined, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Although the character color has been exemplified as the display mode of the timer, a font may be used instead of the character color, a decoration portion may be used to decorate the timer, or a combination thereof may be used.

A fourth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that a plurality of character colors (white, blue, red, rainbow) are set as the display mode of the timer. The same colors as some of the icon color types (white, blue, green, red, zebra, rainbow) set as the display mode are set. That is, the icon color set as the final icon display mode includes all the character colors set as the timer display mode. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand which character color timer has a high expectation for a big win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.
Also, the permutation of the degree of expectation of a big win indicated by the color type is common between the icon color type set as the icon final display mode and the character color type set as the timer display mode.

The type of character color set as the display mode of the timer and the type of icon color set as the final display mode of the icon may be exactly the same type.

In addition to the final display mode of the icon, all the character colors set as the display mode of the timer, or A part may set the same color. Also in this case, it is preferable that the permutation of the degree of expectation for a big win indicated by the color type be common between the display color of the timer and other effects.
Here, the other effects include, for example, a plurality of dialogue display colors may be provided in the dialog preview effect, and the effect color and the emission color of the frame lighting device 10 are changed each time a step progresses in the step-up preview effect. It may be something that changes, and various productions can be imagined.

A fifth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the display position of the timer (the degree of expectation for a big win is higher the closer to the center of the screen). By doing so, the player becomes interested in the display position of the timer, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the display size of the timer differs depending on the display position of the timer, it can be said that the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the display size of the timer (the larger the size, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win).

A sixth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that timer subtraction starts after the standby display is performed rather than when the standby display indicating that the execution of the timer effect is waiting is not performed. When it is done, the expectation of the jackpot is higher. By doing so, the expectation of the player can be heightened even before the timer is counted down, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The seventh feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that when the timer time (total) is the same, the expected degree of jackpot is higher when the timer is updated with the special pattern than with the normal pattern. There is a point that it will be higher. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the pattern is a special pattern, thereby making it possible to enhance the amusement of the game.

The eighth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the rewind time in the special pattern tends to be longer in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the big win lottery result (depending on the timer time after rewinding). There is a difference in the degree of expectation for the jackpot). By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the rewinding time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The ninth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the initial timer time and the timer time after rewinding in the special pattern are different (the timer time after rewinding is shorter than the initial timer time). is mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation until the rewinding is completed, making it possible to enhance the interest in the game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, an event suggested by a timer effect and an event not suggested (jackpot announcement effect) are set. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the variable presentation, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it can be said that the number of events suggested by the timer production and the number of events not suggested (jackpot announcement production) are different. Specifically, the number of events suggested by the timer effect is greater than the events not suggested (jackpot announcement effect). It should be noted that the number of events that are not suggested by the timer effect may be larger than the number of events that are suggested.

In this embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, it always counts up to "0 seconds". Also good. In the case of ending in the middle like this, it is sufficient not to suggest any predetermined event (so-called fake effect).

Further, in the present embodiment, a timer effect is executed in which the timer (quantity) displayed on the image display device is subtracted as an update effect. Then, a count-up effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win (for example, the type of ready-to-win effect, etc.) may be executed according to the quantity indicated by the finally displayed quantity image. Even in this case, whether or not to execute the count-up effect is the same as in the roulette notice effect (in the case of the special SP reach effect, the reach effect other than the special SP reach effect is executed. It is preferable to determine so that the count-up effect is difficult to execute).

(Jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 46, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m. is executed after the process of determining

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable effect pattern executed in the current variable effect, and in step E650-2, determines that the jackpot game is executed in the effect period (high-speed fluctuation period) before reach. A pre-reach notice determination table (FIGS. 47 and 48) for determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice performance expected by the player is selected, and the notice pattern is determined. The details of the pre-reach announcement determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the dialogue notice effect. If the dialogue foretelling effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-4, and if the dialogue foretelling effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-6.

"Dialogue advance notice effect" is to generate an effective period during a variable effect (high-speed fluctuation period), and suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit on the image display device according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the elapse of the effective time. It is a kind of big hit announcement effect in which a dialogue image is displayed and a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.例文帳に追加

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the dialogue notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 49) for determining the dialogue notice pattern of the dialogue notice effect, and determines the dialogue notice pattern. Set a speech announcement effect command corresponding to the announcement pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialog announcement effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the dialog announcement effect corresponding to the dialog announcement pattern is executed during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialog announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the step-up notice effect. If the step-up notice effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-7, and if the step-up notice effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-9.

The "step-up notice effect" is a plurality of steps from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) without generating the effective period of the effect button 17 during the variable effect (high-speed fluctuation period). It is a kind of big-hit advance notice effect in which step effects are executed in a predetermined order until one of the steps (steps) is reached.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 50) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up notice pattern. At 8, a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. Thereby, the step-up notice performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the step-up notice performance corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialog announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo-continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-10, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-12.

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 51) for determining the pseudo-continuous effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect to determine the pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and step E650-11. , a pseudo-continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a development effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect, all-rotation development effect). If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a development performance, the process moves to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a development performance, the process moves to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub CPU 130a selects the development effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 52) for determining the development effect pattern of the development effect, determines the development effect pattern, and in step E650-14, determines the development effect pattern. A development effect command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development effect corresponding to the development effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the development effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the roulette notice is to be executed using the roulette notice determination table (see FIG. 53) for determining whether or not the roulette notice is to be executed. It is determined whether or not to execute If the roulette announcement effect is to be executed, the process is moved to step E650-17, and if the roulette announcement effect is not to be executed, the process is moved to step E650-19.

The "roulette notice effect" means that, before the start of the ready-to-win effect or after the start of the ready-to-win effect, by operating the effect button 17 during the valid period or by the elapse of the valid period, one of the multiple types of options is changed to roulette. , and the type of the selected option suggests the effect to be executed after that (the effect to be executed immediately).

In step E650-17, the sub CPU 130a selects the stop option determination table (see FIG. 54) for determining the stop option of the roulette notice, determines the stop option, and determines the stop option in step E650-18. Set the roulette notice effect command in the transmission buffer. As a result, the roulette notice effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the roulette notice effect corresponding to the stop option is executed during the variable effect. Details of the stop option determination table will be described later.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a ready-to-win effect (post-reach effect). If it is a variable performance pattern for executing a ready-to-win performance, the process is shifted to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable performance pattern for executing a ready-to-win performance, this time's jackpot announcement performance determination processing is terminated.

In step E650-20, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-21, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-23.

In step E650-21, the sub CPU 130a selects the cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 55 and 56) for determining the cut-in effect pattern of the cut-in effect, determines the cut-in effect pattern, and step E650-21. At E650-22, a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the cut-in effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the cut-in effect corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-23, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a determined effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process is moved to step E650-24, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process is moved to step E650-26.

The sub CPU 130a selects a determined effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 57) for determining the determined effect pattern of the determined effect in step E650-24 to determine the determined effect pattern, and in step E650-25, determines the determined effect pattern. A decision effect command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the determined effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the determined effect corresponding to the determined effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. The details of the determined effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect. If it is the variable performance pattern for executing the re-lottery performance, the process is moved to step E650-27, and if it is not the variable performance pattern for executing the re-lottery performance, the process is moved to step E650-29.

In step E650-27, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern of the re-lottery effect, determines the re-lottery effect pattern, and steps E650-28. , a re-lottery performance command corresponding to the re-lottery performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer. Thereby, the re-lottery effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the re-lottery effect corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern is executed during the variation effect. The details of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-29, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the variable effect pattern of this time is a variable effect pattern capable of executing a fixed effect (which results in a big win) for deterministically notifying that the variable effect pattern will result in a big win. If it is a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, the process is shifted to step E650-30, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, this time's jackpot announcement performance determination processing is terminated.

In step E650-30, the sub CPU 130a selects a confirmed effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 59) for determining the confirmed effect pattern of the confirmed effect to determine the confirmed effect pattern, and in step E650-31, determines the confirmed effect pattern. A fixed performance command corresponding to the pattern is set in a transmission buffer, and the current big hit notice performance determination processing is terminated. As a result, the fixed effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the fixed effect corresponding to the fixed effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the fixed effect pattern determination table will be described later.

(Preliminary decision table before reach)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a pre-reach notice determination table referred to when determining the notice pattern of pre-reach notice effects for production modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. It is a figure which shows the advance notice determination table before reach which is referred when deciding the notice pattern of the notice effect before reach for G (specific game state).

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the before-reach notice determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the selected notice pattern. there is

There are 3 types of advance notice patterns: "no notice" in which the advance notice effect is not executed, "serif notice effect" in which the dialogue notice effect is executed, and "step-up notice effect" in which the step-up notice effect is executed. The type is set, and the degree of expectation for execution of the jackpot game (percentage of execution of the vibration effect associated with the matching of the symbols described above) is no notice<serif notice effect<step-up notice effect.

The first feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that the pre-reach notice effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss, and the expectation of a big win. When a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for big win is determined, the advance notice performance before reach is more likely to be executed than when a variable performance pattern with a low degree of expectation is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that production modes D to G (specific game state) are better than production modes A to C (normal game state). In the case, the advance notice effect before reach (both the dialogue notice effect in which the vibration effect can be executed with the effective period of the effect button 17 and the step-up advance notice effect in which the vibration effect can be executed without the effect period of the effect button 17) is difficult to execute (execution rate is low). Therefore, useless pre-reach announcement effects are less likely to be executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shortened, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the advance notice determination table before reach shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that the production modes D to G (specific game state) are more jackpots than the production modes A to C (normal game state). Even in this case, it is difficult to execute the pre-reach announcement effect (execution rate is low) when the variable effect pattern is the pattern for executing the normal ready-to-win effect and the pattern for executing the SP ready-to-win effect. Therefore, useless pre-reach announcement effects are less likely to be executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shortened, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the before-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. When the advance notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (the ratio of executing the vibration effect accompanying the pattern alignment described above, the ratio of executing the vibration effect in the decided effect described later, etc.) is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. (Other than the production pattern and the special SP reach production pattern), when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed (long fluctuation production pattern, special SP reach production pattern), One of the points is that it is difficult to execute the dialogue announcement effect (operation effect) that accompanies the effective period (operation) of the effect button 17 (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, in the normal game state, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (long variation When the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (special SP reach production pattern) than the production pattern and the reach production pattern other than the special SP reach production pattern) One of the points is that it is difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low) the speech announcement effect (operation effect) that accompanies the effective period (operation) of the button 17 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a seventh feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. Production pattern and special SP reach production pattern) than in the specific game state, when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed (long fluctuation production pattern, special SP reach production Pattern) is more difficult to execute (performed at a lower rate) the dialog announcement effect (operation effect) that accompanies the valid period (operation) of the effect button 17 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the advance notice determination table before reach shown in FIG. 47 and FIG. In the specific game state, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (special SP reach effect pattern) than the reach effect pattern other than the reach effect pattern) One of the points is that it is difficult to execute the dialogue announcement effect (operation effect) that accompanies the effective period (operation) of the effect button 17 (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. Production pattern, special SP reach production pattern), when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed (other than long fluctuation production pattern and special SP reach production pattern), One of the points is that the speech announcement effect (operation effect) accompanied by the validity period (operation) of the effect button 17 is easily executed (the execution ratio is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a tenth feature of the advance notice determination table before reach shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, during the specific game state, when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (special SP When the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (the reach production pattern other than the long fluctuation production pattern and the special SP reach production pattern) than the reach production pattern), the production One of the points is that the speech announcement effect (operation effect) that accompanies the effective period (operation) of the button 17 is likely to be executed (the execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eleventh feature of the advance notice determination table before reach shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal game state (long fluctuation production pattern, special SP The ready-to-win effect pattern) has the point that the dialogue announcement effect can be executed, but the step-up announcement effect is not executed. Therefore, the ratio of executing pre-reach performances and the number of executable pre-reach performances are made different between when the first variable performance is executed and when the second variable performance is executed in the normal game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twelfth feature of the advance notice determination table before reach shown in FIGS. The ready-to-win effect pattern) has the point that the dialogue announcement effect can be executed, but the step-up announcement effect is not executed. Therefore, the ratio of executing pre-reach performances and the number of types of executable pre-reach performances are made different between when the first variable performance is executed and when the second variable performance is executed in the specific game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, than when the step-up notice effect is executed, when the serif notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (the ratio of the vibration effect accompanying the matching of the above-mentioned patterns is executed, the success effect which will be described later) The rate at which the accompanying vibration effect is executed, etc.) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss during the normal game state is executed, or the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss during the specific game state ) is executed, the dialogue announcement effect (operation effect) or the step-up announcement effect (non-operation effect) may not be executed, or the second variation effect (second Also, when the special symbol variable display) is executed, or when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit during the specific game state is executed, the dialog announcement effect (operation effect) or The step-up notice effect (non-operation effect) may not be executed.

(Dialogue notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a dialog announcement pattern determination table referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the dialog announcement effect.

As shown in FIG. 49, the speech announcement pattern determination table is associated with a production mode, a jackpot determination result, a variation production pattern type, a selection rate (%) of each speech announcement pattern, and a speech announcement pattern to be selected. , and for reference, the production configuration (effective suggestive production, effective period, production content) of each line notice pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the speech announcement effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. It is an effect that displays a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and that emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "Normal" in the column of the button state indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude.

``Normal dialogue (black)'' in the dialog production mode column means that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black characters and that normal dialogue is output by voice. showing.
“Chance dialogue (black)” means that a chance dialogue with the possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black characters and the chance dialogue is output by voice.
“Reach lines (black)” indicates that the lines for which the ready-to-win effect is to be executed are displayed in black characters, and that the lines for reach are output by voice.
“Reach lines (red)” indicates that the ready-to-win lines for which the execution of the ready-to-win effect is confirmed are displayed in red characters, and the ready-to-win lines are output by voice.

“Heat speech (red)” indicates that a heat speech that has a high possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in red characters, and that heat speech is output by voice.
“Extremely hot speech (gold)” indicates that an intensely hot speech that has a very high possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in gold letters, and that intensely hot speech is output as a voice.
“Confirmed line (rainbow)” indicates that the confirmed line that confirms the execution of the jackpot game is displayed in rainbow-colored characters, and that the confirmed line is output by voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate 1 from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that a weak vibration production that vibrates weakly over a period of seconds is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the start of the display of the dialogue (=when the production button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). This indicates that a vibrating strong vibration effect is to be executed.

The expected degree of jackpot in each dialogue production mode is “normal dialogue” < “chance dialogue (black)” < “reach dialogue (black)” < “reach dialogue (red)” < “heat dialogue (red)” < “heat Dialogue (gold)” < “Confirmed dialogue (rainbow)”. In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect".

As a first feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49, when a speech with a high expectation for a big hit (heat speech or higher) is displayed, it is possible to execute a vibration presentation in which the presentation button 17 is vibrated. points. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature of the dialogue forewarning pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49, a speech foretelling effect of intensely hot dialogue with a higher expectation for a big win than the hot dialogue is executed than when the dialogue foretelling effect of the hot dialogue is executed. Vibration effect of the effect button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the dialogue advance notice effect of the hot dialogue is executed. The point is that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when it is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the dialogue forewarning effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a speech with a high degree of expectation for a big win (more than a hot speech) is displayed is for a relatively short time. mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when a speech with a high degree of expectation for a big win (more than a hot speech) is displayed is set to 2 according to the degree of expectation for a big win. There are several points. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), while the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) can be executed in the dialogue announcement production, the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special pattern) that results in a loss is executed (special SP reach production Pattern) includes the point that the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) is not executed in the speech announcement production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. In the ready-to-win production pattern), while the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) can be executed in the dialog announcement production, the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed ( The special SP reach effect pattern) includes the fact that the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the speech announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a seventh feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), while the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) can be executed in the dialogue announcement production, the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed in the specific game state. (Long fluctuation effect pattern, special SP ready-to-win effect pattern) includes the point that the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the speech announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. In the reach production pattern), the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) can be executed in the dialog announcement production, while the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit in the specific game state. When it is executed (special SP ready-to-win production pattern), the point is that the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) is not executed in the speech announcement production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. In the SP reach production pattern), the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) is not executed in the dialogue announcement production, while the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a loss is executed (long fluctuation Effect pattern and special SP ready-to-win effect pattern) include the fact that vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the speech announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a tenth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49, in the specific game state, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (special SP ready-to-win effect pattern) , while the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) is not executed in the dialogue announcement production, the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (long fluctuation production pattern and special SP A ready-to-win effect pattern other than the ready-to-win effect pattern) includes the point that the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the dialog announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the speech announcement effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed, or the vibration time of the weak vibration effect may be longer than the strong vibration effect. may be lengthened.

In addition, the degree of expectation for a big hit when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed during the speech announcement performance is the same between the performance modes A to C (normal game state) and the performance modes D to G (specific game state). However, production modes A to C (normal game state) may have a higher degree of expectation for a big hit, and production modes D to G (specific game state) may have a higher degree of expectation for a big hit. can be In this way, it is possible to vary the game characteristics depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to easily increase the player's expectation in the production modes D to G that are advantageous to the player, and to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

Also, the effective period is terminated by the operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of the effective time, and the dialogue forewarning effect is executed. You can choose not to run it.

In addition, although the effective period is generated to execute the dialogue forewarning effect, it is also possible to execute the dialogue forewarning effect without generating the effective period. Only weak vibration effect for 1 second or only strong vibration effect for 1 second may be used.

In addition, when the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, the vibration of the performance button (vibration performance) may be executed in the dialog announcement performance. However, even in this case, it is preferable to make the rate lower than the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss during the normal game state is executed.

In addition, when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, the vibration of the performance button (vibration performance) may be executed in the dialog announcement performance. However, even in this case, it is preferable to set the ratio to be lower than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that causes a loss during the normal game state is executed. It is preferable to make the rate higher than when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed.

In addition, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the vibration of the performance button (vibration performance) may be executed in the dialog announcement performance. However, even in this case, it is preferable to make the rate lower than when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the specific game state.

In addition, when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the vibration of the performance button (vibration performance) may be executed in the dialog announcement performance. However, even in this case, it is preferable to set the ratio to be lower than the case where the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a big win is executed during the specific game state. It is preferable to set the rate higher than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed.

(Step-up notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table referred to when deciding the notice pattern of the step-up notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 50, the step-up notice pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and the step-up notice pattern to be selected. As a reference, the effect configuration (step-up (SU) effect mode, button vibration) of each step-up notice pattern is described.

"1→2" in the step-up effect mode column indicates that the first and second step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the 1st to 3rd step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the 1st to 4th step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the 1st to 5th step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the 1st to 3rd step effects are executed in order, the 4th step effect is skipped and the 5th step effect is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the last step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the last step performance is 3 seconds.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at '5'" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for 1 second from the start of the fifth step effect. indicates that it will be executed.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot in each step-up effect mode is “1→2”<“1→2→3”<“1→2→3→4”<“1→2→3→4→5”<“1→ 2→3→5”.

A first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 17 can be vibrated to vibrate. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with a high expectation of a big win is displayed is relatively short. There is a point. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50, the vibration mode (vibration intensity, vibration There is only one type of preset time (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up notice performance in which the player does not operate the performance button 17 and it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration performance, it is possible to suppress the complication of the performance mode and improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

As a fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the step-up notice effect with low expectation is difficult to execute (execution rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , weak vibration effects are easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the expectation of a big hit is high when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 without the effective period (the display of the operation promoting image) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. and special SP reach production pattern), when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special pattern) is executed (long fluctuation production pattern, special SP reach production pattern), the dialogue notice One of the points is that the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) is difficult to execute (the ratio of execution is low) in the production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that production modes A to C (normal game state) are more effective than production modes D to G (specific game state), and the effect button 17 without an effective period (display of operation promotion image) in the step-up notice effect The degree of expectation for a big win may be increased when the vibration presentation is executed. To improve the amusement of a game by making it possible to vary the game performance according to the type of the performance mode even in this case, and to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous to the player. becomes possible.

(Pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 51, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variation effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and the pseudo-continuous effect pattern to be selected. As a reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestive effect, valid period, effect content) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the pseudo continuous effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. It is an effect that displays a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and that emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Protruding button white" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a projecting state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits white light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which it does not protrude. , and "protrusion" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"Pseudo-failure" in the column of the pseudo-continuous effect mode means that the central effect symbol 70a, which suggests the execution of the pseudo-continuous, is not temporarily stopped, and the normal effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, and a failure sound effect is produced. This indicates that the pseudo consecutive failure effect to be output is executed.
"Pseudo-success" means that the central effect symbol 70a, which is a pseudo-symbol suggesting execution of a pseudo-continue, is temporarily stopped, a success effect sound is output, the second movable member 74 is weakly operated, and the pseudo-continuation effect is performed. It shows that the pseudo consecutive success effect to be performed is executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 is temporarily stopped in the pseudo symbol (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that a weak vibration presentation is executed for one second.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from when the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped (=when the production button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends). It shows that the strong vibration effect to be performed is executed.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is "normal button white" < "protruding button white". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each button state is "normal" < "protruding". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect".

A first feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that a vibration effect for vibrating the button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the vibrating effect that is executed when the pseudo-continuous success effect is performed is relatively short in the variable effect pattern with a high expectation of a big win. The point is that Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on . Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51, the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) can be executed (pseudo continuous success effect), but production modes D to G (specific game state) are more likely than production modes A to C (normal game state). ) has a higher expectation for a big hit when a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is possible to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. There is a case where a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) is executed using a button vibration motor that vibrates the . Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Incidentally, the effect button 17 during the effective period may be in a protruding state when the simulated consecutive success performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, but it may not be in a protruding state.

In addition, although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the pseudo continuous success effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

In addition, although the effective period is generated to execute the pseudo consecutive success effect and the pseudo consecutive failure effect, it is also possible to execute the pseudo consecutive success effect and the pseudo consecutive failure effect without generating the effective period. Often, the vibration effect to be executed in the pseudo continuous success effect may be only 3 seconds of weak vibration effect or only 3 seconds of strong vibration effect, or only 1 second of weak vibration effect or only 1 second of strong vibration effect. can be

In addition, the production modes A to C (normal game state) are simulated using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) than production modes D to G (specific game state). The degree of expectation for a big hit when a continuous effect (pseudo continuous success effect) is executed may be higher, and the effect mode B or C is more likely than the effect mode A with the same effect device (effect button vibration Motor, second movable member 74, etc.) may be set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit when a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) is executed is high, or the effect mode D ~ is higher than the effect mode G. Even if F has a higher expectation for a big hit when a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. good.

Also, in the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect), an action effect using the second movable member 74 is executed, but an action effect using the first movable member 73 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to make the execution ratio of the motion representation using the second movable member 74 higher than that of the motion representation using the first movable member 73 .

(Development effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a development effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the development effect.

As shown in FIG. 52, the development performance pattern determination table includes performance modes, jackpot determination results, variable performance pattern types, development performance types for which development performance patterns are determined, selection rates (%) of each development performance patterns, Developed production patterns to be selected are associated with each other, and the production configuration (effective suggestive production, effective period, production content) of each developed production pattern is described for reference.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"None" in the effective suggestive production column indicates that the effective suggestive production is not executed, and "Yes (gase)" means that the effective suggestive production is executed, but the effective period does not occur after that. "Yes" indicates that the effective suggestive effect is executed and then the valid period occurs.

The 'effective period (long press for 4 seconds)' indicates that the development effect progresses step by step by pressing the effect button 17 for a long time and that the effective period of the development effect ends when 4 seconds elapse.
The "promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the valid period. The button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and that emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Normal button red" means that a button image that imitates the production button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque production button image described above, and the production button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which it does not protrude. , and "protrusion" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"SP notification" in the column of the development mode means that as a result of the development mode, an SP development pattern is derived and displayed to suggest the development to the SP ready-to-win mode, and the SP development mode that outputs the first development effect sound is executed. Which indicates that.
"SPSP notification" means that as a result of the development production, an SPSP development pattern indicating development to the SPSP ready-to-win production is derived and displayed, and an SPSP development production that outputs a second development sound effect is executed. .
"Full spin notification" means that as a result of the development production, a full spin development pattern is derived and displayed to suggest development to a full spin reach production, and a full spin development production that outputs a third development effect sound is executed. is shown.

The "weak action" in the column of character action is a weak action production in which the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak action with a small movement width when various symbols are derived and displayed (=at the end of the effective period). is executed.
The "strong action" means that the second movable member 74 emits light in red when various symbols are derived and displayed (=at the end of the effective period), and a strong action effect with a large swing width is executed. is shown.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is weak for 1 second from the time of derivation display of various development patterns (= the end of the valid period). It shows that a vibrating weak vibration effect is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" refers to a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the time various symbols are derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each action production is "weak action"<"strong action". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration production is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration".

The first feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. A vibrating effect may be executed in which the effective period of the button 17 is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the full-rotation development effect, which has a higher chance of winning a big hit than the SPSP development effect, is executed rather than the SPSP development effect. , the vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is easily executed (execution rate is high), and the performance button 17 is more likely to be activated than when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed when the SPSP development performance is executed. When the vibration presentation is executed, the expectation for the big hit is higher. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed when the SPSP development performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that it is a variation effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win, and is executed when a development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) with a high degree of expectation for a big win is performed. One of the points is that the vibration effect is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, the vibration of the vibration effect that is executed when the variation effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for the big win and the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed There are two types of intensity depending on the degree of expectation for a big hit. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the development production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, the same production device (production button vibration motor , second movable member 74, etc.) can be executed (SPSP development effect, etc.), but production modes D to G (specific game state) are more effective than production modes A to C (normal game state). There is a point that the degree of expectation for the big hit is higher when the development effect using the effect device (the effect button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is possible to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), while the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) can be executed in the development production, when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed (special SP reach production pattern ) includes the point that the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) is not executed in the development production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a seventh feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), while the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) can be executed in the development production, when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (special SP reach production pattern ) includes the point that the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) is not executed in the development production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), while the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) can be executed in the development production, the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed in the specific game state ( The special SP ready-to-play effect) includes the point that the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the development effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. In the reach production pattern), the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) can be executed in the development production, while the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed in the specific game state. In the case of (special SP reach production pattern), the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) is not executed in the development production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth feature of the development production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, in the specific game state, when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a loss is executed (special SP ready-to-win production pattern) , while the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) is not executed in the development production, when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed (other than the special SP reach production pattern). is that the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) can be executed in the development production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the tenth feature of the development production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, in the specific game state, when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (special SP ready-to-win production pattern) , while the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) is not executed in the development production, the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (reach other than the special SP reach production pattern) Effect pattern) includes the fact that the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the development effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the development effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

In addition, production modes A to C (normal game state) are more advanced than production modes D to G (specific game state) using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) The degree of expectation for a big hit when a production (SPSP development production, etc.) is executed may be set to be higher, and production mode B or C may be higher than production mode A using the same production device (production button vibration motor , the second movable member 74, etc.) may be set to increase the expectation of the jackpot when the development performance using the second movable member 74 is executed, and the performance modes D to F are the same performance as the performance mode G. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be increased when a development effect using a device (the effect button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed.

In addition, when the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, the vibration of the effect button (vibration effect) may be executed in the development effect. Even in this case, it is preferable to make the rate lower than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss during the normal game state is executed.

In addition, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, the vibration of the effect button (vibration effect) may be executed in the development effect. Even in this case, it is preferable to set the ratio to be lower than the case where the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) that causes a loss during the normal game state is executed, and the loss occurs during the normal game state. It is preferable to make the rate higher than when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed.

In addition, when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss during the specific game state is executed, the vibration of the production button (vibration production) may be executed in the development production. , Even in this case, it is preferable to make the ratio lower than the case where the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss during the specific game state is executed.

In addition, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the vibration of the effect button (vibration effect) may be executed in the development effect. However, even in this case, it is preferable to set the ratio to be lower than when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed during the specific game state, and a loss occurs during the specific game state. It is preferable to set the ratio higher than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed.

(Roulette advance notice decision table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a roulette notice determination table referred to when determining whether or not to execute the roulette notice effect executed during the variable effect. The roulette notice determination table is associated with a jackpot lottery result, a variable effect pattern, and a distribution ratio (%) of whether or not the roulette notice effect can be executed.

A first feature of the roulette notice determination table shown in FIG. When it is executed, it is difficult to execute the roulette notice effect during the variable effect.

That is, when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, the reach production other than the special SP reach is executed, while the first variation production is executed during the specific game state. When (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, since the special SP reach performance is executed without executing the reach performance other than the special SP reach performance, the first variation that causes a loss during the normal game state. The execution of the roulette notice performance (selection performance) is more difficult when the first variation performance that results in a loss is executed during the specific game state than when the performance is executed. By doing so, in the normal game state in which the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the first variation performance can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, the first variation effect (fluctuation of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit during the specific game state is more likely than the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big win is executed during the normal game state. display) is executed, the roulette announcement effect (selection effect) is less likely to be executed. By doing so, in the normal game state in which the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the first variation performance can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game is improved. becomes possible.

Further, when the first variable performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the special SP ready-to-win performance is executed without executing the ready-to-win performance other than the special SP ready-to-win. When the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the reach performance other than the special SP reach is executed, so the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state. The roulette notice effect (selected effect) is more likely to be executed when the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state than when it is executed. In this way, during the specific game state in which the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the second variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game is improved. becomes possible.

Although the roulette notice effect is executed when the special SP ready-to-win effect is executed, the roulette notice effect may not be executed when the special SP ready-to-win effect is executed. . In this case, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, and when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state When executed, the roulette announcement effect is not executed.

(Roulette notice stop option decision table)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a roulette notice stop option determination table referred to when deciding a stop option in the roulette notice effect. The stop option determination table of the roulette notice is associated with the variation effect pattern, the distribution ratio (%) of the stop option, the determined stop option, and the type of the displayed option.

Six types of stop options are set: "cass", "simulated run", "chance", "SP", "SPSP", and "full rotation".

The “cass” is not an option that suggests any of the effects, but an option that suggests that the expectation of winning the jackpot is low (losing).
“Pseudo-continuous” is an option suggesting that a pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed.
"Chance" is not an option that suggests any of the effects, but an option that suggests that the probability of winning a big win is higher than that of "Kasu".
"SP" is an option suggesting that the SP ready-to-win effect is executed.
"SPSP" is an option suggesting that the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.
“Full rotation” is an option suggesting that the full rotation ready-to-reach effect is executed.

A first feature of the roulette advance notice stop option determination table shown in FIG. 54 is that the degree of expectation for a big win varies depending on the type of displayed option. Specifically, the expectation of a big win is higher when it does not contain “chance” than when it contains “chance”, and when it does not contain “chance” than when it contains “chance”. The degree of expectation is high, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the case of including "full rotation" than in the case of not including "full rotation". By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the degree of expectation for a big win from the types of options, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the stop option determination table for roulette notice shown in FIG. However, the roulette notice effect including options with high expectations for big wins is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) than when the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed. be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a third feature of the stop option determination table for roulette notice shown in FIG. However, in a specific game state, a roulette notice effect including options with high expectations for a big hit is more likely to be executed than when the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed (special SP reach) ( high percentage of execution). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the roulette notice stop option determination table shown in FIG. When the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed (other than the special SP reach), it is easier to execute the roulette notice production including options with high expectations for big hits (percentage of execution high) points. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the stop option determination table for roulette notice shown in FIG. In the specific game state, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed (other than the special SP reach), it is easier to execute the roulette notice effect including options with high expectations for big hits ( high percentage of execution). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Cut-in effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table referred to when deciding the effect pattern of the cut-in effect for effect modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. It is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the cut-in effect for G (specific game state).

As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the cut-in effect pattern determination table includes the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and the selected cut-in effect pattern. are associated with each other, and the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each cut-in effect pattern is described for reference.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the cut-in effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 4 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the valid period. An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and that emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a projecting state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and "normal" indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protrusion" indicates a state in which the effect button 17 protrudes.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in effect mode column indicates that a cut-in image in a blue frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a blue cut-in effect is executed in which a first cut-in effect sound is output. It indicates that
“Green cut-in” indicates that a cut-in image in a green frame is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a green cut-in effect is executed in which a second cut-in effect sound is output. .
"Red cut-in" indicates that a cut-in image with a red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a red cut-in effect is executed in which a third cut-in effect sound is output. .

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column is when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the cut-in image (=when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends) It shows that a weak vibration presentation is executed for three seconds from .
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 lasts for 3 seconds from the time the cut-in image starts to be displayed (=when the production button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that a strong vibration effect is executed in which strong vibration is performed.

The expected degree of jackpot for each cut-in is "blue cut-in" < "green cut-in" < "red cut-in". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect".

As a first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The point is that a vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that the vibration effect executed when a cut-in image with a high expectation of a big win is displayed (cut-in effect is executed) is relatively small. The point is that it takes a long time. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is the vibration intensity of the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high expectation of a big win is displayed (cut-in effect is executed). There are two types depending on the expected degree of jackpot. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fourth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed (special SP Other than reach), the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) in the cut-in production is more than when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed (special SP reach), which is a loss. The point is that it is easy to execute (the ratio of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the normal game state, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (special SP Other than reach), the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) in the cut-in production is greater than the case where the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (special SP reach). The point is that it is easy to execute (the ratio of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed (special SP Other than reach), the vibration of the production button 17 in the cut-in production than when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed (special SP reach), which is a loss in the specific game state. (Vibration production) is easily executed (the ratio of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a seventh feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the normal game state, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (special SP Other than reach), the vibration of the production button 17 in the cut-in production than when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed (special SP reach) to be a big hit in the specific game state. (Vibration production) is easily executed (the ratio of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the specific game state, when the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed (special SP When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed (other than the special SP reach), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) in the cut-in effect is more pronounced than the reach). The point is that it is easy to execute (the ratio of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the specific game state, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (special SP When the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed (other than the special SP reach) than the reach), the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) in the cut-in production The point is that it is easy to execute (the ratio of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the cut-in effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

Also, although the effective period is generated and the cut-in effect is executed, the cut-in effect may be executed without generating the effective period. Only weak vibration effects for 3 seconds or only strong vibration effects for 3 seconds may be used, or only weak vibration effects for 1 second or only strong vibration effects for 1 second may be used.

In addition, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss during the normal game state is executed, or the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss during the specific game state ) is executed, the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) may not be executed in the cut-in production, or the second fluctuation production (the second special symbol fluctuation display) is executed, or when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit during the specific game state is executed, the vibration of the production button 17 in the cut-in production (vibration production ).

In addition, when the second variable effect (the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, the cut-in effect including the effective suggestive effect may not be executed, or the effective suggestive effect may not be executed. A cut-in effect that is not executed may be executed, or if the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the cut-in effect including the effective suggestive effect is performed. may not be executed, or a cut-in effect in which the effective suggesting effect is not executed may be executed.

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a determined effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 57, the determined effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the determined effect pattern to be selected. , and for reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, valid period, effect content) of each determined effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the final effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 5 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the valid period. An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and that emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a projecting state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and "normal" indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protrusion" indicates a state in which the effect button 17 protrudes.

"Failure" in the column of the determined effect mode means that the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color, thereby indicating that the jackpot game is not executed. is executed.
“Success” means that the first movable member 73 operates to the maximum operating position and emits light in rainbow colors, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. It indicates that a successful production that is determined to suggest is executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the column of button vibration is determined by the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17. It shows that a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds from the hour) and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is determined from the start of the successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that the rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the effect button 17 strongly vibrates).

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is "normal button white" < "protruding button red" < "protruding button rainbow". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each button state is "normal" < "protruding".

A first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that, when a successful fixed effect is executed, a vibrating effect is executed in which an effective period is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 generated during the variable effect is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that the effect button 17 vibrates for the longest period of time as a strong vibration effect that occurs during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of the winning performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth characteristic of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 17 ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, in the decision effect (decision success effect), the action effect using the first movable member 73 is executed, but the action effect using the second movable member 74 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to set the execution ratio of the action effect using the first movable member 73 higher than the action effect using the second movable member 74 .

(Re-lottery effect pattern decision table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 58, the re-lottery effect pattern determination table includes the effect mode, the presence or absence of promotion (whether it is scheduled to be promoted), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery effect pattern, and the re-lottery effect pattern to be selected. They are associated with each other, and for reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each re-lottery effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the re-lottery effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position without executing the effective suggesting effect. Along with this, a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and that emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Normal button red" means that a button image that imitates the production button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque production button image described above, and the production button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Normal button rainbow" means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which it does not protrude. showing.

"Promotion failure effect" in the column of re-lottery effect mode refers to a non-promoted pattern that does not become a effect pattern that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect (for example, even number pattern → even number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7" → Odd symbols other than "7") are derived and displayed (temporarily stopped), and a non-promoting sound effect is output.
"Promotion success effect" means that the promotion pattern (for example, even number pattern → odd number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7" → "7" pattern) that becomes a production pattern that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect is derived and displayed. (temporary stop), and a promotion sound effect is output.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time the promotion pattern is displayed (= the end of the valid period). It shows that the strong vibration effect to be performed is executed.

"Rainbow light emission (4 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is displayed for 4 seconds (when the effect button 17 It shows rainbow emission over a longer period of time than strong oscillation.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is “normal button white” < “normal button red” < “normal button rainbow”.

A first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when the promotion success effect is executed, a vibrating effect is executed in which the effective period is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. be done. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the fact that the pattern has been promoted to an advantageous performance symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Note that the re-lottery performance (promotion failure performance, promotion success performance) is executed by generating the validity period, but the re-lottery performance may be executed without generating the validity period.

(Fixed production pattern decision table)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a fixed effect pattern determination table referred to when deciding the effect pattern of the fixed effect.

As shown in FIG. 59, the finalized effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each confirmed effect pattern, and the selected confirmed effect pattern. The effect configuration (execution timing, effect content) of each fixed effect pattern is described.

"-" in the execution timing column indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is not executed, and "○" indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is executed.
"Determined sound" in the voice column indicates that a determined sound indicating that a jackpot game is to be executed is output.
"Handle rainbow light emission" in the column of light emission means that the handle LED for lighting the firing handle 15 emits light in rainbow colors from the time when the confirmation sound is output until the fluctuation stops (for 4 seconds or more until the production pattern stops displaying). indicates that

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the column of button vibration means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time when the confirmation sound is output. is shown.

A first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that, when a fixed effect is executed, a vibrating effect of vibrating the effect button 17 is executed without generating an effective period. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game is to be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 15 is performed over a longer period of time than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a third feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59, in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed (other than the special SP reach), The point is that the fixed production (vibration production of the production button 17) is easier to execute (the execution rate is higher) than when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed (special SP reach). mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the fourth feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59, in the specific game state, the second When the variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed (other than the special SP reach), the fixed production (vibration production of the production button 17) is easily executed (the execution rate is high). mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, or when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state In addition, the confirmation effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) may not be executed.

(Summary of various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59)
Here, as a first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, a vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed in the dialogue announcement effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17. Compared to the case where the effect button 17 is not accompanied by the effective period of the step-up notice effect (1 second weak vibration), the expectation of the big hit (vibration effect (strong vibration 4 second) is executed, and the ratio of vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) is executed in the decided production, etc.) is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed with the dialogue notice effect with the effective period of the effect button 17 rather than the case where the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed with the step-up notice effect without the effective period of the effect button 17. second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed, the degree of expectation of the jackpot (the ratio of execution of the vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the pattern alignment described above, the vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds→5 seconds) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a second feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, the vibration effect executed as the jackpot announcement effect has a relatively short vibration period of the first vibration effect (at the time of the dialogue notice effect, step-up effect). Vibration effects (1 second) during advance notice effects, simulated continuation effects, development effects, etc., and second vibration effects with a longer vibration period (production period) than the first vibration effect (during cut-in effects, determined success effects) There is a vibration effect (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second, such as at the time of the fixed effect, and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) ) and a variable effect with a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) during the first effect period than during the second effect period. points. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the look-ahead vibration effect is also the first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period, but even if the look-ahead vibration effect is included, the second effect is performed after the first effect period (pre-reach effect). In a variable effect with a period (normal reach effect) and a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (executed) in the first effect period than in the second effect period. high percentage). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a third feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. In the variable production with production), the first vibration production (at the time of dialogue announcement production, at the time of step-up announcement production, at the time of simulated continuous production, at the time of development production, etc.) Effect (1 second)) is easy to execute (the execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a fourth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. , Vibration effect (1 second) during simulated continuous effect, development effect, etc.), and second vibration effect with a longer vibration period than the first vibration effect (during cut-in effect, determined success effect, fixed effect, etc.) There is a vibration effect longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) and the third effect period ( SP/SPSP ready-to-reach production), the second vibration production is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) in the second production period than in the first production period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. production), the third production period is longer than the first production period, the second vibration production (at the time of cut-in production, at the time of successful success production, at the time of fixed production, etc. Vibration production longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) is easily executed (the execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, in the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the effect button 17 is set to the normal state and the first vibration effect (1 second) is executed. is higher than the ratio of executing the first vibration effect with the effect button 17 in the projecting state. Therefore, the expectation of the player is not excessively aroused during the first presentation period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a seventh feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, during the third effect period (SP/SPSP ready-to-win effect), the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and the second vibration effect (3 seconds or more) is performed. The ratio of execution is higher than the ratio of executing the second vibration production with the production button 17 in the normal state. Therefore, the expectation of the player is not excessively aroused during the first presentation period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As an eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, the vibration effect executed as the jackpot notice effect includes the first vibration effect with a short vibration period (at the time of the dialogue notice effect, at the time of the step-up notice effect). , Vibration effect (1 second) during pseudo continuous effect, development effect, etc.), and second vibration effect (during cut-in effect, determined success effect, confirmed There is a vibration performance (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) longer than 1 second during performance, etc., and continuous performance (pseudo-continuous performance) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). In the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the second vibration effect is easier to execute (the execution rate is higher) when the first vibration effect is executed than when the first vibration effect is not executed. ) points. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation of whether or not the first vibration effect will be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a ninth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. There are vibration effects that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds), such as during cut-in effects, determined success effects, and confirmed effects, etc., during production modes A to C (normal game state). In the variable effect, the reach effect by the second type of effect pattern (even number pattern) is easier to execute than the reach effect by the first type effect pattern (odd number pattern other than “7”) (The execution rate is high. ), it is difficult to execute the ready-to-win effect by the third type of effect pattern (the effect pattern of “7”) than the ready-to-win effect by the second type of effect pattern (the ratio of execution is low), and the second type of effect pattern The point is that the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) when the ready-to-win performance by the performance pattern of the third type is executed than when the ready-to-win performance by is executed. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the type of effect symbol for executing the ready-to-win effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a tenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, in the jackpot variation effect in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) during the ready-to-win effect ( Vibration production without effective period (display of operation promotion image) during production after reach (development production, pattern matching, C pattern matching, confirmation production) than the number of times of execution ) is likely to be executed more frequently. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation during the post-reach performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As an eleventh feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, a specific reach effect (SP reach effect , SPSP ready-to-win production) is executed, the number of vibration productions (development production, pattern matching, C pattern matching, fixed production) that does not accompany the effective period during the production after reach tends to increase. is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big win variation presentation from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twelfth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. The number of executions of vibration effects (forecast vibration effects, step-up notice effects, fixed effects) that do not have an effective period during the pre-reach effect is likely to be greater than the number of times the pattern is aligned, final effect) is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win by means of a vibration effect that does not accompany an effective period, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a thirteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution ratio is high) in the case where the post-ready notice performance (cut-in performance) with high expectation of big hit is executed (execution ratio is high), and the pre-ready notice performance. When is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed than when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 17 will be executed when the pre-reach announcement performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a 14th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, production modes D to G (specific game state) are better than production modes A to C (normal game state). , the expectation for the big hit increases when the vibration effect is executed with the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that production modes A ~ C (normal game state) than the production mode D ~ G (specific game state), vibrating with the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) in the notice production after reach The degree of expectation for a big win may be increased when the performance is executed. To improve the amusement of a game by making it possible to vary the game performance according to the type of the performance mode even in this case, and to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous to the player. becomes possible.

As a fifteenth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. When the production is executed, the expectation of the big hit is higher, and in the big hit variation production, regardless of whether or not the vibration production of the production button 17 is executed during the pre-reach production, the production after the reach (determined success production) Later period), the vibration production of the production button 17 (vibration production at the time of pattern matching and C pattern matching) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the game will be a big win by means of the vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

As a sixteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. One of the vibration performances such as continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) is executed in one of a plurality of types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different expectations for big wins. Vibration performance (one of vibration performance such as step-up notice performance, pattern matching, C pattern matching, etc.) without effective period of performance button 17 (display of operation promotion image) executed during variable performance. is executed in one predetermined vibration mode. Therefore, when it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode without the effective period, it is possible to suppress the complication of the presentation mode of the vibration presentation and improve the interest of the game.

As the seventeenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, in the pre-reach production period in the jackpot fluctuation production, the effect period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) accompanied by a vibration production (line notice production) When the vibration effect at the time) is executed, and when the vibration effect without the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promoting image) is executed (vibration effect at the time of the step-up notice effect), then ( The rate of execution of vibration performance (vibration performance of 3 seconds or more such as successful performance, pattern matching, C pattern matching, etc.) is executed during the performance period after reach) is different, and vibration performance without the effective period of the performance button 17 (Vibration effect at the time of step-up notice effect) is easier to execute (execution rate is higher) during the normal game state (production modes A to C) than during the specific game state (production modes D to G). are mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the vibration performance that does not accompany the effective period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the 18th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, when the jackpot variation production is executed, the type of jackpot production pattern (even number pattern, "7" It is possible to change the execution mode of the vibration effect (execution or not, execution timing, etc.) in the big hit notice effect depending on the odd number pattern other than the “7” pattern), but with the execution of the determined success effect and the confirmed effect When the vibration performance is executed by , the vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of the jackpot performance pattern to be aligned (including C pattern alignment). Therefore, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the player on winning a big win while heightening the expectation for the big win by the vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the 19th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, after executing the vibration production (decision success production, etc.) with the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) in the jackpot fluctuation production, the effective period ( It is possible to execute vibration effects (symbol matching, C pattern matching, etc.) that are not accompanied by the display of the operation prompting image), and the vibration effects (decision effect, etc.) that accompany the effective period (display of the operation prompting image) can be performed by operating the effect button 17. While the timing to start vibration varies depending on the timing, the timing to start vibration is predetermined for vibration effects (symbol matching, C pattern matching, etc.) that are not accompanied by an effective period (display of operation prompting image). be done. Therefore, depending on whether or not the valid period (display of the operation prompting image) is accompanied, the vibration effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twentieth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, the same movable member (second It is possible to execute a specific effect (pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, etc.) using the movable member 74), but the specific effect can be performed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The point is that the jackpot expectations are different when is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 21st feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, there are multiple It is possible to execute a step effect that progresses to any of the stages (step-up notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, etc.), but in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state) If the step effect (step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) is the same stage (if it is a step-up notice effect, it is either the 3rd step effect, the 4th step effect, or the 5th step effect, if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, 1 time or 2 times), the big hit expectation is different. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 22nd feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, there are multiple Any of the operation promotion effects can be executed, and an operation effect (any of the development effect, the cut-in effect, and the fixed effect) can be executed according to the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state), the degree of expectation for a big hit when the same operation promotion effect (for example, normal button white) is executed is different, and production modes A to C (normal game state) ) and production modes D to G (specific game state), when the operation production is executed, the effective suggestion production is executed and the operation is promoted rather than the case where the operation promotion production is executed without the effective suggestion production being executed. The point is that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for whether or not the effective suggestive effect is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twenty-third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. There are cases where it is executed with an effective period and cases where it is executed without an effective period, but the vibration period that is executed with the jackpot announcement effect is relatively long (3 seconds or more). is executed with a validity period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect for the operation of the performance button 17, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Summary of various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59)
Here, as the first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. In the game state, operation effects (diaphragm announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, Decisive production, re-lottery production) is easy to be executed (high rate of execution). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the specific game state, the second variation effect ( In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the operation effects (line announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect) involving the operation of the effect button 17 are performed. The point is that it is easy to execute (the ratio of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the normal game state, a first variation effect (variation effect of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit (a ready-to-win effect is performed) is executed. In the specific game state, the operation of the production button 17 before the reach is better when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit (the reach production is performed) is executed. One of the points is that it is difficult to execute an operation effect (such as a dialogue notice effect, a roulette notice effect, etc.) (percentage of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the normal game state, a first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit (a ready-to-win effect is performed) is executed. Operation involving the operation of the production button 17 is better in the case where the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit (the reach production is performed) is executed in the specific game state than in the case of One of the points is that the number of executions of the effects (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, roulette effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect) tends to decrease (decrease rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the specific game state, the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit (reach production is performed) is executed. Compared to the case where the big hit (reach production is performed), the operation production ( Pre-reading vibration effect, speech notice effect, roulette notice effect, etc.) can be easily executed (performed at a high rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the specific game state, the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a jackpot (reach production is performed) is executed. When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, which is a big hit (a reach effect is performed), the operation effect accompanying the operation of the effect button 17 (line notice effect , pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, roulette notice effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect) are likely to increase in number of executions (high rate of increase). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the normal game state, the specific game In the state, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that is a loss is executed, the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development Effect, roulette notice effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) are difficult to execute (performed rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, roulette notice effect , cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) are easily executed (the ratio of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the normal game state, a first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit (a ready-to-win effect is performed) is executed. Vibration of the production button 17 before the ready-to-win is performed when the first variable production (variable display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit (the ready-to-win production is performed) is executed in the specific game state than when the One of the points is that it is difficult to execute the vibration effects (read-ahead vibration effects, speech notice effects, roulette notice effects, etc.) (executed rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a tenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the normal game state, a first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit (a ready-to-win effect is performed) is executed. Operation involving the operation of the production button 17 is better in the case where the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit (the reach production is performed) is executed in the specific game state than in the case of The point is that the number of executions (predictive vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, roulette notice effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) tends to decrease (the rate of decrease is high). be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eleventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the specific game state, the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit (reach production is performed) is executed. Vibration production (read-ahead) that vibrates the production button 17 before reach A vibrating effect, a dialog forewarning effect, a roulette forewarning effect, etc.) can be easily executed (the execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a twelfth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the specific game state, a first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit (a reach production is performed) is executed. Compared to the case where the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a big hit (a reach effect is performed) is executed, the operation effect (forecast vibration effect) involving the operation of the effect button 17 , speech notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, roulette notice effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) are likely to be executed (the rate of increase is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the specific game state, in the normal game state, than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, When the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, the number of types of notice effects that can be executed is larger (the former includes timer effects, dialogue notice effects, development effects, There are roulette notice effect, cut-in effect, and fixed effect, and the latter is various pre-reading effects, timer effects, dialogue notice effects, step-up notice effects, simulated continuous effects, development effects, roulette notice effects, cut-in effects, final effects, Confirmed production) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 14th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the specific game state, in the normal game state, than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, In the case where the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, the notice effect whose execution timing is before the reach (various prefetch effects, dialogue notice effects, step-up notice effects, pseudo-continuous effects, etc.) is likely to be executed many times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the fifteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the specific game state, than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, in the specific game state, In the case where the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the advance notice effect whose execution timing is before the reach (various prefetch effects, dialogue notice effects, step-up notice effects, pseudo-continuous effects, etc.) is likely to be executed many times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 16th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the specific game state, in the normal game state, than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, When the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, the specific production (prefetching operation production, pseudo-continuous Production, development production, decision production, etc.) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 17th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the specific game state, than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, in the specific game state, In the case where the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the specific production (prefetching operation production, pseudo-continuous Production, development production, decision production, etc.) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 18th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the normal game state, the specific game In the state, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which results in a loss, is executed, the motion effect of the movable member (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) (prefetching operation Production, pseudo-continuous production, development production, decision production, etc.) are difficult to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 19th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. When the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the movement production of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) (prefetching operation production, pseudo continuous production, Development production, decision production, etc.) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a twentieth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the normal game state, the specific game In the state, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed, the action effect of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) before the reach ( A look-ahead motion effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) are difficult to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 21st feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the normal game state, the specific game In the state, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit is executed, the action effect of the movable member (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) (prediction action effect) , pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, fixed effect, etc.) is likely to decrease (the rate of decrease is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a 22nd feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. In the case where the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the movement production of the movable member (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) before the reach (prefetching operation production, pseudo Continuous performance, etc.) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a 23rd feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. When the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the movement production of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) (prefetching operation production, pseudo continuous production, The point is that the number of executions of development effects, decision effects, etc.) tends to increase (the rate of increase is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific game state in which the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is likely to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-fourth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Operation effects (speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, re-lottery effect) involving operation of the effect button 17 are more likely to be executed after the ready-to-win. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect after the reach, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects that vibrate the effect button 17 (read-ahead vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, roulette notice effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) are more effective after the reach. The point is that it is easy to implement. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect after the reach, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the twenty-sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. It is easier to execute the action effects (prediction action effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, final effect, etc.) of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) after reach than before. be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect after the reach, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing main processing of the integrated control unit 141 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the overall CPU 141a.

First, the supervising CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers, access permission to the general RAM 141c, initialization (0 clear) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt ), etc., and permits all interrupts in step T3.

The overall CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the display device (first image display device 70, second Adjustment of the light amount (value) of the backlight of the image display device 71), and an adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and the light amount (whether the volume can be adjusted, whether the light amount can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5 ), the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)) process.

It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch 22 can always be performed when the game machine 1 is in the power ON state (after the integrated control unit 141 is activated).

The supervising CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 operable by the player, the voice output device 9 outputs the perform processing for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound.

The supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, the display device (first image display A process for adjusting the light quantity (value) of the backlight of the device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed.

In addition, regarding the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19, it is regulated (restricted) at the time of the start of the variable production and the end of the variable production (stop of the production pattern 70a), and a predetermined period (for example, 0 .5 seconds) has elapsed. Also, during the period from when the power is turned on until the game progress control is started (specifically, during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear preparation mode, during the setting confirmation mode, during the initial operation of the various drive sources of the board unit 500, etc.) (until the timer interrupt is started on the main control board 110), important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, illegal winning , abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) are regulated (restricted) even during notification (output of notification sound).

In addition, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of various effect sounds is restored to the volume before the decrease.

The supervising CPU 141a performs eco mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, it performs processing for controlling the start and end of the eco mode for suppressing power consumption by reducing the amount of backlight of the display devices (first image display device 70 and second image display device 71).

In step T8, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not it has received an effect instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. If the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11, and if the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

The supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, an animation pattern is determined from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c.

The supervising CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and setting it in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c is performed.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 141a sets in the supervising RAM 141c a frame switching flag indicating that it is time to update the display image of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). determine whether or not If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is set by the V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 second (the time when the drawing/display of the effect image for one frame is scheduled to be completed). is set by the V blank interrupt processing which is executed each time the is received. Therefore, the processing of steps T12 to T15 described below is executed each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed (frame update timing).

The general CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the general RAM 141c in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, referring to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter updated by the V-blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9. , the sound scene address is updated based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, this display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and processing for instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer on the display device ( Processing for displaying on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed. In other words, the frame update timing is the start timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as pending display, variable effect, jackpot preview effect, and look-ahead effect) performed by the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. It is supposed to be the end timing.

In addition, effects directly controlled by the effect control unit 130m and the lamp control unit 150 (suspension display by the sub first suspension display 83 and the second sub suspension display 84, effects of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operation) may or may not match the frame update timing.

The overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process of generating an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputting this audio control command to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) is performed.

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs processing for outputting various effects and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control command. When this process ends, the process moves to step T4.

Thus, at the start of the variable production and at the end of the variable production (stop of the production pattern 70a), the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the changeover switch 22 operable by the game clerk are possible, but the player can operate. Volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During the notification (output of notification sound) of the door open error), it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity with the switch 22 operable by the game clerk, but the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible with the cross key 19 operable by the player. are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light amount adjustment on the game parlor side while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light amount does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of various effect sounds is restored to the volume before the decrease. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing an abnormality notification sound due to various effects sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that while the abnormality is being notified (output of the notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light intensity value by the cross key 19 that the player can operate may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the volume value and the light intensity value may be disabled. may be restricted between 0 and 2, for example.

(Concrete example when operating the operation unit while waiting for customers)
With reference to FIG. 61, a specific example of operating the operation unit (the effect button 17, the cross key 19) during the customer waiting state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), when the transition to the customer waiting state in which the variable production and the jackpot production are not executed, the effective suggestion production (introduction production) suggesting that the valid period may occur is not executed. Effective period during customer waiting during which operations of the production button 17 and the cross key 19 are valid (Because the effective period during customer waiting is maintained until the variable production is started, it is can occur over a long period of time) is started.

At this time, in the lower right portion of the first image display device 70, a guide image AG (operation promotion image) is displayed to guide the game assistance function started by operating the effect button 17 and the cross key 19. FIG. Specifically, the first image (image imitating the effect button 17) suggesting that the menu display is performed by operating the effect button 17, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 19. and a third image suggesting that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 (the left and right buttons are A light-colored image simulating the cross key 19) is displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the menu image MG is displayed so as to be superimposed in front of the effect pattern 70a without vibrating the effect button 17, and the menu image MG is displayed. is output.

The menu image MG includes an "end" item for ending the menu display, a "model description" item for explaining the model, a "effect customization" item for setting the appearance rate of a predetermined effect (for example, a fixed effect, etc.), A "pachi log" item is set to manage the game history in cooperation with a mobile terminal (smartphone, etc.), and while the currently selected item is displayed in a light color, the currently unselected item is displayed in a dark color. It is now displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated with the "end" item selected, the menu image MG is erased without vibrating the effect button 17 as shown in FIG. 61(c). Also, the sound for erasing the menu image MG is output, and the guide image AG is displayed again.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, as shown in FIG. 61(d). At the same time, a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is increased by +1 without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, as shown in FIG. 61(e). Updated. Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output with the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without the cross key 19 being operated in this state, the volume value image OG is erased and the guide image AG is displayed again, as shown in FIG. .

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, the production button 17 related to various advance notice effects (dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) that occurs during the variable effect. Even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 is operated during the customer waiting valid period that can occur over a period longer than the valid period, the effect button 17 is vibrated (by vibrating the effect button 17). (including indirect vibration of the cross key 19 to be transmitted) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the performance button 17 or the cross key 19 is operated during the customer waiting state, and to avoid the inconvenience of giving the player an unpleasant feeling. becomes.

In addition, regarding the effective period of the cross key 19 related to the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment that occurs during the variable effect (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot effect (jackpot game), various advance notice effects (speech) that occur during the variable effect It can occur over a period longer than the effective period related to the advance notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.), but during the effective period of the cross key 19 related to volume adjustment and light amount adjustment , Even if the cross key 19 is operated, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 19 transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 17) is not executed. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised during the variable performance or the big winning performance, and to avoid the inconvenience of making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, for the customer waiting valid period, the effective suggesting effect (introductory effect) suggesting that the valid period may occur before the valid period occurs is not executed. It's like Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though the information beneficial to the player (the effect to expect the execution of the jackpot game) is not executed, and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving

In addition, regarding the effective period of the cross key 19 related to the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment that occurs during the variable production (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot production (jackpot game), the effective suggestive production (introduction production) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though the information beneficial to the player (the effect to expect the execution of the jackpot game) is not executed, and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, during the effective period of customer waiting that can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the effect button 17 (display period of the operation prompting image) that occurs during the variable effect The effective period of the production button 17 (operation When the effect button 17 is operated during the promotion image display), the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, the effective period of the effect button 17 related to various advance notice effects that occur during the variable effect includes a relatively short first effective period (operation promotion related to dialog advance notice effects, etc.). There is a valid period accompanied by the display of an image) and a relatively long second valid period (valid period accompanied by the display of an operation promotion image related to a determined effect, etc.), but the effective period of the effect button 17 that occurs during the variable effect When the effect button 17 is operated during the second valid period, the effect button 17 is more likely to be operated than when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period during customer waiting, which can occur over a longer period. It is easy to execute the vibration presentation to vibrate. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period of waiting for customers, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 at a predetermined rate may be executed. At a lower rate than when the production button 17 is operated during the effective period of the production button 17 related to various advance notice effects (dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) Vibration production should be executed.

(Concrete example when the variable production is started from the customer waiting state)
A specific example when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. FIG. FIG. 62 is a timing chart when the variable effect starts from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 63(a) to (f) and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the standby time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the reservation icon and the icon TI are not displayed. .

The timing of T1 is the timing (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state) when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special pending number and the non-animated increase display of the first pending icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generation, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated The output of the notification sound is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "0" to "1 , and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display portion 70B1. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure pending number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of special symbols) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of customer waiting state 5th frame from ). At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the first special symbol reservation number, and the change display (decrease display) by the animation of the first reservation icon to the icon concerned be started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is changed from "1" to "0 , and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display portion 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the output of the first generated notification sound (the 14th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first suspended icon (white icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the effect The reduced display (preparation operation) of the pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame timing (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) after the change display (decrease display) of the first pending icon starts. At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(e), in the first image display device 70, the first suspended icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and Along with the icon TI, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 45th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the variable display in the center Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 55th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the center variable display area, the right variable display Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started, and the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variable effect (230th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the left variable display area, The temporarily stopped character image of the effect pattern 70a performs an action effect of moving the head, and the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the center and right variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side, The temporarily stopped character image of the effect pattern 70a performs an action effect of moving the head, and the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a state of being swayed) in the center variable display area, and temporarily The character image of the stopped production pattern 70a performs an action production of moving the head, and the combination of the production pattern 70a indicating that it is lost is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 305th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The combination "365", which is the same as the pattern 70a, is stopped and displayed. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special figures increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, the incremented display of the reserved number and the reserved icon by non-animation is the shortest 1 frame Since it ends in a period of minutes (hours), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable performance (decrease display of the pending number and change display of the pending icon) so as not to delay, and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon is (frame Since it continues until the update) timing, the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special figures decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the decrease display of the reserved number by non-animation, and the change display of the reserved icon to the icon by animation are executed Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the timing of completing the decrease display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier than the timing of completing the change display of the pending icon to the icon (frame update), special figure pending While directing that the number changes, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the number of reserved special symbols has been reduced by the reserved number, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, until the change display of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern is displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling (update to the next production pattern) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable production starts after the reserved memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of pending special figures increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, instead of executing the increasing display of the pending icon with non-animation, rather than the increasing display of the pending number Animation over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) may be executed so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special figures, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Also, instead of starting the decreasing display of the pending number and the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (decreasing display) at the same (frame update) timing, the timing of completing the decreasing display of the pending number (frame update) is changed. Either can be started first, as long as it is faster. By doing so, while improving the degree of freedom of display control, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting the scrolling of the production pattern (update to the next production pattern) at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), the change display of the pending icon You may make it start the scrolling of the production|presentation design (update to the next production|presentation design) at the (frame update) timing of a little before completion.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases during a variable effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. FIG. 65 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variable effect, and FIGS.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect by the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the icon (white icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 60th frame from the start of the variable production) when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the increase display by non-animation of the first special reservation number and the increase display by animation of the first reservation icon are started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started. be.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "0" to "1 , and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display portion 70B1 to start enlarged display. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 70th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is finished and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of reserved special figures is increased, the increase display of the reserved number by non-animation and the increased display by animation of the reserved icon are executed, so that the player can see that the number of reserved special figures has increased. It is possible to reliably recognize the game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the increase display of the pending number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the number of pending special figures will change. While directing that, the player can easily grasp that the number of reserved special symbols has increased by the reserved number, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the variable effect, the increasing display of the reserved icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the pending number and the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increased display of the pending icon ends in synchronization with the timing of the end of the increased display of the pending icon (frame update), so special figure pending The increase in the number can be effectively produced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the period (10 frames) related to the increased display of the suspended icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) related to the change display of the suspended icon, the start of the variable effect is indicated. It can be emphasized, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending number and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing of completing the increased display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier, which may start first. By doing so, while improving the degree of freedom of display control, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special figure pending has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period of increasing display of the pending icon, the period of increasing display of the pending icon may be longer than the period of changing display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the special figure pending number has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period for increasing display of the pending icon than the period for displaying the change of the pending icon to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Concrete example when the number of pending items increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. FIG. 67 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 68(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. 67(a) to (f).

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 5th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. It has become. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and a first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2, and the icon TI is not displayed. state.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the 20th frame after the stop display of the effect symbol 70a) at which the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the first special pattern reservation number, the change display by the animation of the first reservation icon to the icon, and the first reservation icon Decrease display by animation starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "2" to "1 ”. Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed in the first display portion 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second icon displayed in the second display portion 70B2 1 pending icon (white icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display portion 70B1. Furthermore, the reduction display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure reservation number is started, but since the change display of the first reservation icon and the decrease display are being executed, the increase display of the first reservation icon and the icon The output of the generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when generated, is put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2 , and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the first pending icon (the 40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the changing display and decreasing display of the first pending icon are finished. In addition, the animation display of the waiting first hold icon is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and At the same time as the icon TI, the first pending icon H12 moved from the second display portion 70B2 is positioned at the center of the first display portion 70B1, and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a stops. In addition, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display portion 70B2 and enlarged display is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound (beep) from the audio output device 9 is started. be.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the first generated notification sound are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display portion 70B2 and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (blink) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first pending icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is finished and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, when the number of special figures pending increases during the execution of the change display of the pending icon to the icon and the decrease display of the pending icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed. Even before the (frame update) timing, in order to start increasing the display of the pending number, the change display of the pending icon and the increase in the number of pending special figures even during the execution of the decreasing display can be made to recognize, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, if the number of special pending icons increases during the execution of the change display of the pending icon to the icon, and the decreasing display of the pending icon, wait for the increased display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound ( limit), and at the timing when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started. can be prevented from becoming difficult to grasp, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of outputting the notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number. good too.

In addition, at the timing when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), instead of starting the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound (the start is delayed than usual), It is also possible to start increasing the display of the pending icon and outputting the generated notification sound at a timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the changing display and the decreasing display of the pending icon. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difficulty of grasping the transition of the special figure pending number, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, even if the number of special pending items increases during the increasing display of the pending icon, wait for the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound, just like during the change display or decrease display of the pending icon. On the other hand, the increasing display of the pending number is started, and at the timing when the increasing display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound can be started.

(Specific example when the number of pending increases during specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of pending games increases during the specific ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 69 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 70(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. .

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal ready-to-win effect executed before the SP ready-to-win effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the icon (white icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 90th frame from the start of the normal ready-to-win effect (the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed on the screen. Movement to the upper left and reduced display are started, and the effect design 70a changes to a simple display mode in which only numbers are enlarged.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the development effect is started (the 445th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP reach effect continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "75" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and The effect pattern 70a being scrolled is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen and displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the development effect is started (the 460th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, while the development effect is finished, the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and is displayed at the center of the screen. A confrontation production is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, while leaving the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C, the suspended icon (here, only the first pending icon) is hidden together with the pending icon display area. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ is the same "7" symbol as the production symbol 70a, and is in the ready-to-win state.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special pending number is started, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display and icon generation of the first pending icon at this timing The generated notification sound, which is the time notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(d), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2 , and the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for informing whether or not a jackpot is achieved) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decision effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(e), in the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, and an effect pattern 70a displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is displayed. is temporarily stopped at a combination ("555") indicating a big hit (becomes in a swaying state).

In addition, in the normal game state, regardless of whether the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed or the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the performance symbol In the SP/SPSP ready-to-win performance in which the character image 70a is a display mode of only numbers with no character image, even if the center performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the action performance of the character image is not performed.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (showdown effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the non-animated return display and increase display of the first pending icon are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70( f ), in the first image display device 70 , the effect pattern 70 a that has been displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen, and is temporarily stopped (shaking state). become). Also, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display portion 70B2.

Then, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, right variable display area returns to the display mode composed of characters and numbers, and finally, the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is displayed. Stop display is performed at the same combination "555" as the production pattern 70a. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the special figure pending number increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), even before the timing of this specific effect ending (frame update), the number of pending numbers Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special figures increases during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the pending icon is put on standby (restricted), and the specific effect ends (it was displayed in a reduced size At the timing when the losing performance pattern or the jackpot performance pattern is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), the increase display of the pending icon is started, so it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the special pending number, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the increase display of the pending icon is performed by non-animation completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of special pending numbers increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of executing the increase display of the pending icon and the timing of executing the increase display, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the special figure hold number increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generated notification sound. It becomes difficult for the player to misunderstand that the player has done so, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special pending numbers increases during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), while executing the increasing display of the pending number, the execution of the increasing display of the pending icon is on standby (restricted) It is preferable that the display of the increased number of pending icons be performed collectively in one frame at the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update).

In addition, when the special figure pending number increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the pending number. good too.

Moreover, although the SP ready-to-reach effect was exemplified as the specific effect, the specific effect may include the SPSP ready-to-win effect, or may include the full rotation ready-to-reach effect.

(Concrete example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
71 to 73, a specific example when the number of pending games increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state will be described. FIG. 71 is a timing chart showing that the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 72(a) to (f) and FIGS. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect corresponding to (i);

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(a), "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. ing. Further, the first pending icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second pending icons (white icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D. and the icon TI is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable performances that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "remaining 0 times") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, a game ball is directed toward the right side area of the game area 5a. A right-hand shot image MU prompting the player to shoot is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 415th frame after the start of the variable production) when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure pending number is started, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increased display of the first pending icon and the notification sound when the icon occurs The generated notification sound is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2 , and the effect pattern 70a continues to be scrolled.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left, middle, and right variability display areas are temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the left, middle, and right variable display areas. A combination of performance symbols 70a indicating that the game is lost is displayed.

In addition, in the specific game state, regardless of whether the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed or the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the performance symbol Since the character image 70a is displayed only with numbers without character images, even if the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in any variation effect pattern, the action effect of the character image is not performed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display is started to show the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG darkens, and "special time end" indicating the end of the specific game state and a predetermined advantageous period The number of times of the executed jackpot game "jackpot x 1" is displayed inside. Also, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(e), on the first image display device 70, the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. Stop display is performed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variable performance) at which the last (100th) variable performance in the specific game state ends and the first variable performance in the normal game state is started. At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the second reservation number, the change display of the second reservation icon to the icon by animation, the decrease by animation of the second reservation icon The display, the non-animated return display of the first pending icon, and the non-animated increasing display of the first pending icon are initiated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73 (g), in the first image display device 70, the second reservation number of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3", The second pending icon (white icon) H21 displayed on the first display portion 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display portion 70D2 to the fourth display portion 70D4. The second pending icons (white icons) H22 to H24 that have been displayed start moving (shifting) toward the next display section.

Further, the first pending icon display area is restored and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Furthermore, the reduction display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling. In addition, a left-hand shot image HU is displayed on the upper left of the screen to prompt the shooting of the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame timing (the 510th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, the change display and decrease display of the second pending icon are terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73(h), in the first image display device 70, the second suspended icon H21 moved from the first display section 70D1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and Along with becoming the icon TI, the second pending icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display portion 70D2 to the fourth display portion 70D4 are positioned at the center of the adjacent display portion, and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is performed. Stop.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame timing (the 520th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the end of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll (downward movement).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbols 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbols 70a are displayed in the center variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

Thus, when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increased display of the first reserved icon is waited (restricted), while the increased display of the first special figure pending number is displayed. Since it starts, the player can be made to recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of the specific effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of the first special figure pending (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first pending icon at the timing when the specific game state (last variable effect in) ends (frame update). , even if you miss the increase display of the first special figure pending number executed before that, you can recognize that the number of the first special figure pending number has increased, and enjoy the game. can be improved.

In addition, when starting to increase the display of the first reserved icon at the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends, to perform the increased display of the reserved icon by non-animation that is completed in one frame. Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of increasing the number and the timing of executing the increasing display of the pending icons, the sense of incompatibility of the player can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the special figure at the timing when the specific game state ends due to the generated notification sound It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, until the change display of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern is displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling (update to the next performance pattern) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the performance during the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of the first special figure reservation increases during the specific game state, while executing the increase display of the reservation number, the execution of the increase display of the reservation icon is waited (restricted), At the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends (frame update), the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase may be collectively performed in one frame.

Further, when the number of the first special figure pending increases during the specific game state, instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increasing display of the reserved number.

In the present embodiment, the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, but the second reserved icon display area 70D is set (displayed). ), only the first pending icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not the specific effects (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) are being executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect, or without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F were set (displayed) in the first image display device 70, but the second image display device 71 , or may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. And when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of special figures pending according to the lighting color and lighting / blinking mode of the LED.

(Example of effect when the player changes the effect element during the first variable effect in the specific game state)
With reference to FIG. 74, an example of the effect when the player changes the effect element during the first variable effect in the specific game state will be described.
It should be noted that, here shows an example that has become a probability variable gaming state as a specific gaming state, basically the same when it is a time-saving gaming state.

First, as shown in FIG. 74(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "285" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In this state, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first special figure reservation number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific gaming state, the first pending icon is not displayed, and any generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the voice output device 9. never.

From this state, when the first variable effect is started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 0", but the pending icon is not shift-displayed (reduced display), the effect symbol 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the current volume value is changed to "4". BGM is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to ".

Further, left-handed error notification based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45 in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed error image HUE suggesting that a game ball is to be shot toward the right side area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a size larger than the right-handed image MU, and an audio output device. From 9, a left-handed error voice saying "Please hit the right hand" is output.

In addition, instead of performing left-handed error notification due to the fact that one game ball has won in the first start port 45 in the specific game state, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls have won in the first start port 45 You may make it perform left-handed hitting error alerting|reporting by having done.

Furthermore, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, the second special figure reservation number (U2) becomes "1", the generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the voice output device 9, and the second special figure reservation The number display area 70F becomes "1". Also, a pending icon H21 (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the second pending icon display area 70B.

Note that the left-handed error notification may be ended at the timing when the game ball wins the second starting hole 47. In this case, the left-handed error image HUE is erased before the left-handed error sound. Alternatively, the left-handed error sound may be erased before the left-handed error image HUE.

After that, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 do not vibrate, and the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "4" is displayed. is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is increased by +1 without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, as shown in FIG. 74(d). The BGM that has been updated and is currently being output is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output with the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol passes and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed when the number "379" is lost. Also, the sound volume value image OG is erased according to the stop display of the production pattern 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the first special symbol has passed, the first variation effect is completed, and the second variation effect is started with the start of the next variable display of the second special symbol, FIG. 74(f). , the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and the second pending icon (white icon) H21 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the production pattern 70a starts the reduced display (preparation operation), the special pattern TZ starts scrolling, and the volume ( Effect element) continues to output BGM.

In this example, the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated during the first variable effect in the specific game state to increase the volume value, but the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value. Basically the same applies to cases.

Also, when the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 is operated during the first variable effect in the specific game state to increase or decrease the light amount value, the light amount value is displayed instead of the volume value image OG by operating the cross key 19 An image is displayed, and the operation is basically the same except that the light amount of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, the image display device, etc.) changes according to the increase or decrease of the light amount value.

Further, when the second variation performance is executed after the first variation performance in the specific game state, and the performance mode is changed by operating the performance button 17 during the first variation performance, the background The image is changed to the background image corresponding to the changed effect mode, and the BGM is changed to the BGM corresponding to the changed effect mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the first variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed in the effect mode after the change from the start of the next second variable effect. good. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. In addition, even if the production mode is changed in the specific game state, the display mode of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is not changed, but the display form of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ may not be changed.

Also, when the second variation performance is executed after the first variation performance in the normal game state, and the performance mode is changed by operating the performance button 17 during the first variation performance, The background image is changed to the background image corresponding to the changed effect mode, and the BGM is changed to the BGM according to the changed effect mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the first variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed in the effect mode after the change from the start of the next second variable effect. good. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Also, in the normal game state, when the production mode is changed, the display mode of the production pattern 70a is changed, but the display form of the special pattern TZ is not changed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIG. 74, by operating various operation units (production button 17, cross key 19) during execution of the first variable production in the specific game state, the second to be executed next It is possible to change the production elements (volume value, light amount value, production mode, etc.) used for the variable production. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 74, even if the game ball wins the first start opening 45 during the specific game state in which the first pending icon is not displayed, the generated notification sound (winning sound) is not output. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is puzzled by outputting only the generated notification sound even though the first pending icon is not displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 74, even if the game ball wins the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state, when the normal icon (white icon) is displayed, the generated notification sound ( When the winning sound) is not output and a special icon is displayed, a notification sound corresponding to the type of the special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is fed up with the generated notification sound in the specific game state in which the game balls are likely to enter the second start hole 47, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, at the start of the first variable effect, the pending icon is not shift-displayed and the icon is not displayed, but the pending icon may be displayed without being shift-displayed. .

(Example of effect when the player changes the effect element during the second variable effect in the specific game state)
With reference to FIG. 75, an example of effect when the player changes the effect element during the second variable effect in the specific game state will be described.
It should be noted that, here shows an example that has become a probability variable gaming state as a specific gaming state, basically the same when it is a time-saving gaming state.

First, as shown in FIG. 75(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "285" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. When the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 in this state, the second special figure reservation number (U2) becomes "1", the second special figure reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", and the second reservation icon A pending icon H21 (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the display area 70B. In addition, since the white icon is displayed even if the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 during the specific game state, no generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the voice output device 9 (a special icon is displayed If it is, the generated notification sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output).

When the second variation effect is started with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol from this state, as shown in FIG. 0", and the second suspended icon (white icon) H21 displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the second suspended icon display area 70D starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Also, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), the special pattern TZ starts scrolling, and BGM is output from the audio output device 9 with a volume corresponding to the current volume value "4".

Furthermore, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first special figure reservation number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific gaming state, the first pending icon is not displayed, and any generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the voice output device 9. never.

Further, left-handed error notification based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45 in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed error image HUE suggesting that a game ball is to be shot toward the right side area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a size larger than the right-handed image MU, and an audio output device. From 9, a left-handed error voice saying "Please hit the right hand" is output.

In addition, instead of performing left-handed error notification due to the fact that one game ball has won in the first start port 45 in the specific game state, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls have won in the first start port 45 You may make it perform left-handed hitting error alerting|reporting by having done. Also, the left-handed error notification may be ended at the timing when the game ball wins the second start hole 47. In this case, the left-handed error image HUE is erased before the left-handed error sound. Alternatively, the left-handed error sound may be erased before the left-handed error image HUE.

After that, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 75(c), the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 do not vibrate, and the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "4" is displayed. is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is increased by +1 without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, as shown in FIG. 75(d). The BGM that has been updated and is currently being output is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output with the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the change time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed when the number "379" is lost. Also, the sound volume value image OG is erased according to the stop display of the production pattern 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the second special symbol has passed, the second variation effect is completed, and the first variation effect is started with the start of the next variable display of the first special symbol, FIG. 75(f). , the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", but the shift display (decrease display) of the pending icon is not performed, and the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed (preparation operation) At the same time, the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the output of the BGM at the volume (effect element) corresponding to the volume value "5" adjusted (changed) during the previous second variable effect continues. .

In this example, the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated during the first variable effect in the specific game state to increase the volume value, but the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value. Basically the same applies to cases.

Also, when the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 is operated during the first variable effect in the specific game state to increase or decrease the light amount value, the light amount value is displayed instead of the volume value image OG by operating the cross key 19 An image is displayed, and the operation is basically the same except that the light amount of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, the image display device, etc.) changes according to the increase or decrease of the light amount value.

Further, when the first variation performance is executed after the second variation performance in the specific game state, and the performance mode is changed by operating the performance button 17 during the second variation performance, the background The image is changed to the background image corresponding to the changed effect mode, and the BGM is changed to the BGM corresponding to the changed effect mode. However, the period during which the performance mode can be changed during the second fluctuation performance (only during the pre-reach performance) is shorter than the period during which the sound volume value and the light quantity value can be changed (other than when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops).

In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the second variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed in the changed effect mode from the start of the next first variable effect. good. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. In addition, even if the production mode is changed in the specific game state, the display mode of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is not changed, but the display form of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ may not be changed.

Also, when the first variable performance is executed after the second variable performance in the normal game state, and the performance mode is changed by operating the performance button 17 during the second variable performance, The background image is changed to the background image corresponding to the changed effect mode, and the BGM is changed to the BGM according to the changed effect mode. However, the period during which the performance mode can be changed during the second fluctuation performance (only during the pre-reach performance) is shorter than the period during which the sound volume value and the light quantity value can be changed (other than when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops).

In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the second variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed in the changed effect mode from the start of the next first variable effect. good. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Also, in the normal game state, when the production mode is changed, the display mode of the production pattern 70a is changed, but the display form of the special pattern TZ is not changed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIG. 75, by operating various operation units (production button 17, cross key 19) during execution of the second variable production in the specific game state, the first It is possible to change the production elements (volume value, light amount value, production mode, etc.) used for the variable production. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 75, even if the game ball wins the first start hole 45 during the specific game state in which the first pending icon is not displayed, the generated notification sound (winning sound) is not output. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is puzzled by outputting only the generated notification sound even though the first pending icon is not displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 75, even if the game ball wins the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state, when the normal icon (white icon) is displayed, the generated notification sound ( When the winning sound) is not output and a special icon is displayed, a notification sound corresponding to the type of the special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is fed up with the generated notification sound in the specific game state in which the game balls are likely to enter the second start hole 47, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, at the start of the first variable effect, the pending icon is not shift-displayed and the icon is not displayed, but the pending icon may be displayed without being shift-displayed. .

(Example of effect when look-ahead motion effect and step-up notice effect are executed)
76 and 77, a description will be given of an effect example when the look-ahead motion effect and the step-up notice effect are executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 76(a), the first image display device 70 is in a state in which the performance symbol 70a of "468" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the fluctuation production (equivalent to advance fluctuation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. One holding icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the first effect of the look-ahead action effect over three times of variable effects is started. Specifically, as a weak advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, performs a weak motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion effect sound. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon (the left end in the drawing) to be the announcement target of the look-ahead operation effect changes to a blue icon, as shown in FIG. After the (preparation operation) is completed, the normal size scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, after which the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position and the first rendering of the look-ahead operation rendering is completed. Also, the winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp changing effect is started.

Then, when the variation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 76(d), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a loss of "365", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a loss of "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production pattern has passed and the next fluctuation production (corresponding to the advance fluctuation) is started, as shown in FIG. to "1", the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the second effect of the look-ahead motion effect is started. Specifically, as a weak advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, performs a weak motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion effect sound. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon targeted for the advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect changes to a red icon, as shown in FIG. After that, the normal size scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, after which the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the second rendering of the look-ahead motion rendering ends. Also, the prize winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp changing effect is continued.

Then, when the variation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 77(g), the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a losing number of "635", and the special symbol TZ is stopped-displayed with a losing number of "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production pattern has passed and the fluctuation production (corresponding to the fluctuation) to be the notice target of the look-ahead operation production is started, as shown in FIG. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the third effect of the look-ahead motion effect is started. Specifically, as a strong advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits red light, performs a strong motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a strong motion effect sound. be done.

After that, when the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 77(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is completed, and the normal size scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started. Then, the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the third performance of the look-ahead motion performance is completed.

When a predetermined time elapses after the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 70a is started, as shown in FIG. 77(j), the first step effect of the step-up notice effect is started. Specifically, the first step image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the first step sound effect is output. After that, the second to fourth step effects are sequentially executed.

Further, when the fourth step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 77(k), the fifth step effect is started, the fifth step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the fifth step sound effect is displayed. is output. In addition, while the production button 17 is turned off, a weak vibration production is started in which the production button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output when the game board decoration LED is played, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are continued.

After 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 77(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends, and 2 seconds later, the 5th step effect ends. Thereafter, SP ready-to-win performance is executed after normal ready-to-win performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, or SPSP ready-to-win performance is to be executed after normal ready-to-win performance is executed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, after the number of reservations displayed in the special figure reservation number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (production pattern 70a starts the preparation operation ) and before starting the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a, the look-ahead operation production (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the look-ahead action performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production and before the movement of the pending icon is completed, the look-ahead operation effect (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the look-ahead action performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the vibration production is not executed during the first to fourth step productions of the step-up notice production, and the vibration production is executed during the fifth step production with the highest degree of expectation. It's supposed to run. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the fifth step production (1 seconds) are shorter. Therefore, the appearance of the fifth step presentation is not overwhelmed by the vibration presentation, and the presentation effect of the step-up notice presentation can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the vibration production executed during the fifth step production does not accompany the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image ( The effect sound when displaying the opaque effect button image, the gauge image) and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation effect sound, movable member operating effect sound, etc.) are not output. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, even during the vibration production of the production button 17, the production light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change production are continued. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the performance effect by not performing processing such as pausing the performance light emission or the lamp change performance by the vibration performance accompanying the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the effect button 17 is not illuminated in the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect in the step-up notice effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined manner (for confirming the big hit) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the rainbow color which is the luminescence color, and in a luminescence mode different from the luminescence mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white blinking or yellow blinking. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp that the vibration effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the vibration effect that does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 attracts attention by the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emission toward the effect button 17). You may make it perform production light emission.

(Production example when anticipation vibration production and dialog announcement production are executed)
78 and 79, a description will be given of an example of an effect when the look-ahead vibration effect and the dialogue notice effect are executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 78(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "468" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the fluctuation production (equivalent to advance fluctuation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. One holding icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the first performance of the look-ahead vibration performance over the three fluctuation performances is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for one second and the effect button 17 blinks white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration is not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the sound effect when the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image) is displayed. Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon (the left end in the figure) to be notified of the pre-reading vibration effect changes to a blue icon, as shown in FIG. (Preparation operation) is completed and scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in normal size is started, then the weak vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the first performance of the look-ahead vibration performance is completed. Also, the winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp changing effect is started.

Then, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 78(d), the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a losing number of "365", and the special symbol TZ is stopped-displayed with a losing number of "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production design has passed and the next fluctuation production (corresponding to the advance fluctuation) is started, as shown in FIG. to "1", the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the second look-ahead vibration effect is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for one second and the effect button 17 blinks white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration is not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the sound effect when the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image) is displayed. Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon to be notified of the pre-reading vibration effect changes to a red icon, as shown in FIG. Upon completion, scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, after which the weak vibration and white blinking of the effect button 17 are stopped, and the second effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. Also, the prize winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp changing effect is continued.

Then, when the fluctuation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 79(g), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a loss of "635", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a loss of "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production design has passed and the fluctuation production (corresponding to the fluctuation) to be the notice target of the look-ahead vibration production is started, as shown in FIG. 79(h), the first special figure pending number display As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the third production of the look-ahead vibration production is started. Specifically, as a strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for three seconds, and the effect button 17 flashes red for three seconds. However, since the execution of this strong vibration is not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image) Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, when the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 79(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is completed and the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started. The strong notice of will continue. After that, the strong vibration and white flashing of the effect button 17 are stopped, and the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed, as shown in FIG. be done. Specifically, an operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed in the dialogue window image SW. A display sound effect is output and the production button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. , a sound (effect sound) corresponding to the hot lines is output. In addition, while the production button 17 is turned off, a weak vibration production is started in which the production button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second. The lamp change production continues.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 79(l), the weak vibration of the production button 17 stops and the weak vibration production ends. After that, a pseudo-continuous performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, a normal reach performance is executed, an SP reach performance is executed after the normal reach performance is executed, and an SPSP reach performance is executed after the normal reach performance is executed. It will be executed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, after the number of reservations displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (production pattern 70a is the preparation operation is started) and before the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation), the look-ahead vibration effect (vibration of the effect button 17, blinking in white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production and before the movement of the pending icon is completed, the anticipatory vibration effect (Vibration of production button 17, blinking in white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the example of effect shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, when executing the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 is flashed in white although the effective period of the effect button 17 is not accompanied. Therefore, even when the performance button 17 is not operated, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the lighting mode of the production button 17 in the look-ahead vibration production is a forewarning production with an effective period It is different from the light emitting mode of the effect button 17 during the valid period in the effect, final effect, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as misunderstanding that the effective period of the effect button 17 has occurred in the look-ahead vibration effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the pre-reach forewarning effects (speech forewarning effects, step-up forewarning effects) are not executed until the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it is difficult to notice that the read-ahead vibration performance, which is difficult to judge visually, is being executed due to the pre-reach announcement performance, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the pseudo continuous production is not executed until the look-ahead vibration production ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it is difficult to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect which is difficult to judge visually is being executed due to the pseudo-continuous effect, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the dialogue advance notice production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue advance notice production. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the dialogue foretelling effect without vibrating the appearance of the dialogue foretelling effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the vibration production executed during the look-ahead vibration production does not accompany the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). The display sound when the production button image, gauge image) is displayed and the production sound (operation effect sound, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period are not output. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, since the vibration production executed during the speech announcement production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production) button images, gauge images), and effect sounds (operation effect sounds, dialogue voices, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the speech announcement production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the execution period of the vibration production executed at the time of the speech announcement production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, even during the vibration production accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the production light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change production are continued. there is Therefore, it is possible to maintain the performance effect by not performing processing such as pausing the performance light emission or the lamp change performance by the vibration performance accompanying the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue announcement effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined state (rainbow color, which is the luminescence color for confirming the big win) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the above, but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white flashing or yellow flashing.

Also, regarding the vibration effect executed during the dialog preview effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 0.5 seconds after) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, during the vibration effect that does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 attracts attention by the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emission toward the effect button 17). You may make it perform production light emission.

(Timer production and execution time)
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the timer effect of the variable effect pattern in which the timer effect may be executed and the execution timing of the timer effect will be described.

For the timer effect, as an event timer effect, there is a "pseudo-continuous timer effect" that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo-continue, a "normal reach timer effect" that suggests the start of the normal reach effect, and a "SP reach" that suggests the start of the SP reach effect. Occurrence timer effect", "SPSP reach occurrence timer effect" suggesting the start of the SPSP reach effect, "Full rotation reach generation timer effect" suggesting the start of the full rotation reach effect, Suggesting the occurrence of the effective period of the effect button 17 There is a "valid period occurrence timer effect" and a "jackpot pattern stop timer effect" that suggests that the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), in the case of variable effect patterns 6, 14, and 19, there is a possibility that three of the simulated consecutive occurrence timer effect, normal reach occurrence timer effect, and SP reach occurrence timer effect will be executed.

In this case, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Also, the normal reach generation timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Also, the SP reach generation timer effect is started between T5 and T6 and ends at T6.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), in the case of variable production patterns 7, 15, and 20, four normal reach generation timer effects, SP reach generation timer effects, SPSP reach generation timer effects, and effective period generation timer effects are executed. There is a possibility that

In this case, the normal reach generation timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Also, the SP reach generation timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Also, the SPSP reach generation timer effect is started between T5 and T6 and ends at T6. Also, the effective period occurrence timer effect is started between T5 and T7 and ends at T7.

As shown in FIG. 80(c), in the case of variable production patterns 11 and 22, it is possible to execute four effects: a pseudo continuous timer effect, a normal reach timer effect, an SPSP reach timer effect, and a valid period timer effect. have a nature.

In this case, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Also, the normal reach generation timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Also, the SPSP reach generation timer effect is started between T5 and T8 and ends at T8. Also, the valid period generation timer effect is started between T7 and T9 and ends at T9.

(Example of timer effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, an effect example in which two timer effects are executed during the variable effect will be described. Here, it is assumed that execution of the variable effect pattern 22, the pseudo-continuous timer effect (normal pattern 7), and the effective period generation timer effect (normal pattern 21) is determined in the normal game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 81(a), when the white character timer STW is displayed and the timer effect is being executed (the timer time is subtracted), the same "7" as the left and right effect symbols is temporarily stopped. When the reach state is formed, the normal reach production is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(b), after the white character timer STW reaches "0 seconds remaining", the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area as a pseudo success effect, and a success effect sound is output. , the pseudo 2 fluctuation period ends (the red flame effect associated with the pseudo continuous effect is omitted in the drawing).

Then, as shown in FIG. 81(c), the production pattern 70a changes again, and "x3" indicating the number of times of pseudo fluctuation (that the stage of production progresses) is displayed in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81(d), the SPSP development pattern temporarily stops in the middle area, a temporary stop effect sound is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and operates. be done. At this time, when the effective period generation timer effect is started, the image display device 70 displays a white character timer YTW of "35 seconds left" as a normal display, and the subtraction of the timer time is started.

After that, the screen is whited out and the development effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. The SPSP reach effect is started. Note that the pending icon and the corresponding icon are hidden with the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. At this time, the white character timer YTW becomes "33 seconds remaining", which is the timer time during subtraction.

Then, when the SPSP ready-to-win production approaches the final phase, as shown in FIG. 81(f), an effective suggestive production is started to suggest that the operation of the production button 17 may be effective for the final production. be done. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are assembled from four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen. At this time, the white-character timer YTW becomes "two seconds left", which is the timer time during subtraction.

Then, after the semi-transparent effect button images have gathered at a specific position in the center of the screen and the white character timer YTW has reached "0 seconds remaining", the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 5 seconds) is generated, and an opaque effect button image simulating a red light emitting effect button 17 projecting at a specific position in the center of the screen, and an operation prompting image SG composed of a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period. is displayed, the display effect sound of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 is in a projecting state and emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 81(h), the decided success effect is started. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. The game is temporarily stopped in a state in which three performance symbols 70a of "7" are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and production buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

(An example of an effect when the roulette notice effect is performed before the ready-to-win effect and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed)
With reference to FIG. 82, an example of the effect when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed before the ready-to-win effect will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 82(a), SPSP development pattern suggesting development to SPSP ready-to-win effect, SP development pattern to suggest development to SP ready-to-win effect, pseudo symbol suggesting execution of pseudo-continuous effect, and jackpot A roulette notice effect is executed in which a plurality of options such as chance symbols suggesting that the winning expectation is higher than the scrap symbols are rotated and variably displayed like a roulette. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 82(b), it is notified that the pseudo symbol among the plurality of types of options is stopped and the pseudo continuous effect is executed.

After that, when the roulette notice effect ends, as shown in FIG. 82(c), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area and a success effect sound is output (the blue effect associated with the pseudo continuous effect is omitted in the figure). . In addition, as shown in FIG. 82(d), the second movable member 74 emits blue light, and performs a weak action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the production pattern 70a changes again. “×2” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations (that the stage of production has progressed) is displayed in blue.

After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, as shown in FIG. 82(e), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the right area. 70a is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is continued in the middle area, and a pseudo-flashing effect is executed to agitate whether or not the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuation is temporarily stopped in the middle area. At this time, an effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and an operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 17 emitting white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed and operated. A display sound effect of the promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 82(f), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success effect sound is output. (The red flame effect accompanying the pseudo-continuous production is omitted in the figure). In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 82(g), the weak vibration of the production button 17 stops and the weak vibration production ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light, and performs a strong action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the production pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo fluctuations (the stage of production progresses) "x3" indicating that the user has completed the task) is displayed in red.

After that, when the strong action time (1 second) of the second movable member 74 elapses, the simulated continuous success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. is temporarily stopped and the normal reach performance is executed, and after that, after the normal reach performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, the SP reach performance corresponding to the SP development pattern that did not stop at the roulette is executed, or the normal reach performance is executed. After being executed, the SPSP ready-to-win effect corresponding to the SPSP development pattern that did not stop in the roulette is executed.

(Production example when pseudo-continuous production is executed after reach production)
With reference to FIG. 83, an example of the effect when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed after the ready-to-win effect will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 83(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the left area, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the right area, In the middle region, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues. At this time, the effective period of the effect button 17 does not occur, and the pseudo continuous success effect is started. More specifically, an inciting effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo symbols suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect are temporarily stopped in the middle area. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, when the fanning effect ends, as shown in FIG. 83(b), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area, and a success effect sound is output (the blue flame effect associated with the pseudo continuous effect is omitted from the figure). ). In addition, as shown in FIG. 83(c), the second movable member 74 emits blue light, and performs a weak action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the production pattern 70a changes again. “×2” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations (that the stage of production has progressed) is displayed in blue.

After that, when a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 83(d), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 83(e), when the pseudo-continuation effect is started, a pseudo-influence effect is executed to prompt whether or not the pseudo-symbol suggesting execution of the pseudo-continuation is temporarily stopped in the middle area. At this time, an effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 17 emitting white light and an operation prompting image SG composed of a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed and effected. Button 17 emits white light. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. The red flame effect that accompanies the pseudo-continuous production is omitted in the figure). In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

When 1 second has passed since then, as shown in FIG. 83(g), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light, and performs a strong action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the production pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo fluctuations (the stage of production progresses) "x3" indicating that the user has completed the task) is displayed in red.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 83(h), the production pattern 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win production is executed. The SP ready-to-win effect is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed, or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed.

As described above, according to the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the vibration effect can be executed when the pseudo continuous effect is executed with the generation of the effective period of the effect button 17 in the pseudo continuous effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the pseudo consecutive success production is longer than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo consecutive success production. It's getting shorter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the pseudo consecutive success presentation without the vibrating presentation being superior to the appearance of the pseudo consecutive success presentation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the vibration production executed during the pseudo-continuous production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). A display sound effect when displaying a button image, a gauge image) and a sound effect (operation effect sound, success effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the execution period of the vibration production executed in the pseudo continuous production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

82 and 83, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed after the ready-to-win effect, the type of effect symbol that forms the ready-to-win state after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is the pseudo-continuous effect. Downgrading from the type of production pattern that formed the reach state before execution (downgrading from reach with odd-numbered patterns to reach with even-numbered patterns, reach with "7" patterns to reach with even-numbered patterns or odd-numbered patterns other than "7" downgrade). Therefore, the player will not be dissatisfied with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the interest in the game will not be improved.

Further, according to the example of effect shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect that is executed during the pseudo-continuous effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined state (rainbow color, which is the luminescence color for confirming the big win), throughout the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the above, but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white flashing or yellow flashing.

Also, regarding the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated). 0.5 seconds after) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, the effective period of the production button 17 is generated during the pseudo-continuous production, and the vibration production of the production button 17 is executed. The vibration performance may be executed, or the effective period of the performance button 17 may be generated but the vibration performance may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 84, an example of an effect when the development effect is executed and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 84(a), the normal ready-to-win effect is executed by temporarily stopping the effect symbol 70a of "5" in the left area and the right area. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 84(b), as a result of the roulette notice effect, the SP development pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle area, and it is notified that the SP ready-to-win effect will develop.

After that, the screen is whited out and the development effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. The display is reduced in the corner and the SP ready-to-win effect is started. Note that the icon is hidden with the start of the SP ready-to-win effect.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SPSP ready-to-win production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 85, an example of an effect when the development effect is executed and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the normal ready-to-win effect is executed by temporarily stopping the effect symbol 70a of "5" in the left area and the right area. After that, as shown in FIG. 85(b), during the normal ready-to-win effect, an effective suggestion effect is started to suggest that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position at the lower right of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position at the bottom right of the screen, as shown in FIG. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output. , the production button 17 emits red light. It should be noted that the characters "long press" are displayed in the opaque effect button image.

After that, the effect button 17 is long pressed, and when the length of the long press reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or when the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. Along with the stop, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and moves. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the performance button 17 stops and the weak vibration performance ends. After that, the screen whites out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. The SPSP reach effect is started. Note that the pending icon and the corresponding icon are hidden with the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

Thus, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, depending on the type of the special production pattern (the special production pattern that is not temporarily stopped at the end, the special production pattern that is temporarily stopped) that is variably displayed in the roulette production , suggests whether or not it will develop into a production with a high degree of expectation for a jackpot (degree of expectation for a jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectations for the types of special effect symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the effective suggestive production may be executed in the development production, so that the player's expectation for the development of the ready-to-win production with high expectation for big win is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the development production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development production. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the development presentation without vibrating presentation superior to the appearance of the development presentation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, since the vibration production executed during the development production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image, etc.) and a production sound (operation sound effect, temporary stop sound effect, etc.) when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period. Therefore, the production effect of the development production can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the development production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. there is Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the production button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration production executed during the development production, but the production button 17 is kept in a predetermined mode (other than the rainbow color that is the luminescence color for confirming the big win) over the execution period of the vibration production. , but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, for example, white flashing, yellow flashing, etc.).

In addition, the vibration effect executed during the development effect is performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, from the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated). 0.5 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect is variable).

In addition, the effective period of the performance button 17 is generated during the development performance and the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed, but the vibration performance is not generated during the development performance. may be executed, or the effective period of the effect button 17 may be generated but the vibration effect may not be executed.

Further, in production modes A to C (normal game state), when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, the effective suggestive production can be executed during the development production, while the second When the variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, even if the effective suggestive performance is not executed during the development performance or is less likely to be executed than the first variable performance (percentage of execution is low). Well, in production modes D to G (specific game state), when the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, it is possible to execute the effective suggestive production during the development production, When the first variable performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, the effective suggestive performance is not executed during the development performance, or it is less likely to be executed than the second variable performance (executed rate is low). good too.

(Example of production when a cut-in production is executed during SP reach production and a big win is achieved)
86 and 87, a description will be given of an effect example in which a cut-in effect is executed during the SP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 13 to result in a big win.

First, as shown in FIG. 86(a), the effect pattern 70a of the left area and the right area is reduced and displayed at the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the SP ready-to-win effect reaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which two semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the left and right lower portions of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 86(c), the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 4 seconds) occurs, and the projection state occurs at a specific position in the center of the screen. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 emitting red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output. At the same time, the production button 17 is in a projecting state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, the red cut-in effect is started as shown in FIG. 86(d). Specifically, a cut-in image with a red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a third cut-in sound effect is output. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 3 seconds, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After that, when one second has passed since the output of the third cut-in sound effect ended, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect end, and as shown in FIG. An effect is performed as to whether the design 70a is stopped or the effect design 70a of "6" is stopped.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 86(f), a temporary stop is made in a state in which three "5" production patterns 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned), and the production button 17 is pressed for four seconds. Along with the start of a strong vibration performance (big hit determination vibration performance) to vibrate, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

When 4 seconds have passed since then, as shown in FIG. 87(g), the strong vibration effect ends, but the multiple game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. When one second elapses from there, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resumes the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(h), a re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, three "5" effect symbols 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned) and moved in the depth direction to be displayed in a reduced size, and the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) is generated, An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque performance button image imitating a performance button 17 emitting white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of an effective period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG. is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 87(i), promotion failure effect is started. Specifically, three of the "5" production patterns 70a that have been displayed in reduced size are aligned (symbols are aligned), and are moved to the front side of the screen to be enlarged and displayed, and a non-promoted sound effect is output. The effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the game board decoration LED continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87(j), the performance pattern 70a is in the normal size and temporarily stopped, and the promotion failure performance ends. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 87(k), an eye-catching effect suggesting stop display of the effect symbol 70a is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, as shown in FIG. If there are pending numbers, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are activated. It emits rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 87(m), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, and the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555". The symbol TZ is also permanently stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the big win game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, in the case of the variable effect pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed, the process shifts to FIG. 87(k) after FIG. 87(g), and the eye-catching effect is executed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, there is a possibility that the effective suggestion production is executed in the cut-in production, and in addition to the occurrence of the valid period, the expectation of the big win is high. This can be suggested to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in production and the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration production executed during the cut-in production are the same. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the cut-in production. In addition, the vibrating presentation can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, since the vibration production executed during the cut-in production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production) A display sound effect when displaying a button image, a gauge image) and a sound effect (operation effect sound, cut-in effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the cut-in production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when three production patterns 70a in a display mode not including characters are temporarily stopped (symbol alignment), vibration during cut-in production Since the strong vibration performance (big win confirmation vibration performance) is executed over a period longer than the performance, the player can be effectively notified of the big win, and the amusement of the game is improved. It is possible to

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode including characters are temporarily stopped (C pattern alignment), strong vibration production (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reconfirm that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the strong vibration production (big hit confirmation vibration production, big hit confirmation Vibration effect, opening vibration effect) does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promoting image), so the display effect sound and the effective period when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) During operation of the production button 17, the production sound (operation effect sound, other effect sound, etc.) is not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the cut-in production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when the big hit is achieved as a result of the execution of the SP ready-to-win production, the vibration production is executed during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a for the big hit, Vibration presentation is not executed during this stop. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the fluctuation performance is still continuing due to the vibration performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the effect button 17 does not emit light in the vibration effect that is executed during the cut-in effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined state (rainbow color, which is the emission color for confirming the big win), over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the above, but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white flashing or yellow flashing.

Also, while the effective period relating to the cut-in effect is occurring, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue to emit effect light. Until elapses, part or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs may be extinguished, and then the effect light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be resumed. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, when the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

In addition, when the SP ready-to-win production is executed, the production pattern 70a is finally stopped after the eye-catching production and the production of returning the display mode of the production pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed. However, when the result of the SP ready-to-win production results in a failure, the production pattern 70a is finally stopped after the eye-catching production or the production of returning the display mode of the production pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, In the case of a big hit, the production pattern 70a may be permanently stopped in the display mode of only numbers without executing the eye-catching production or the production of returning the display mode of the production pattern 70a to the display mode including the character. .

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 2 seconds later) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, although the vibration performance is executed during the cut-in performance and the promotion success performance, it may be possible to execute the vibration performance during the cut-in performance and not to execute the vibration performance during the promotion success performance, Alternatively, the vibration effect may not be executed during cut-in effect and promotion success effect.

In addition, the vibration performance is executed when the big hit is temporarily stopped by the production pattern 70a with only numbers or when the big win is temporarily stopped by the production pattern 70a including characters, but the production pattern 70a with only numbers is executed. While the vibration performance is executed when the big win is temporarily stopped, the vibration performance may not be executed when the big win is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including the character, or vice versa, or only the numbers. Vibration performance may not be executed at the time of temporary stop of the big winning number by the production pattern 70a and at the time of temporary stop of the big winning number by the production pattern 70a including the character.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (even during the cut-in effect, the winning entrance lamp NR corresponds to the display mode of the icon). It is designed to emit light in different colors), but it may be designed to emit light and extinguish in conjunction with the light emission mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Production example 1 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production and the jackpot is achieved)
Using FIGS. 88 and 89, an effect example 1 in the case where a big hit is achieved by executing a determined effect during the SPSP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 20 will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 88(a), three production patterns 70a form a ready-to-win state and are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left part of the screen to execute the SPSP ready-to-win production. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the SPSP ready-to-win effect reaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are assembled from four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 emitting red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output. At the same time, the production button 17 is in a projecting state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, the determined success effect is started as shown in FIG. 88(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. The game is temporarily stopped when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and production buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the success effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. A blessing production is started to bless the big hit while the light emission continues. Then, when the blessing effect is completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88(f), it is temporarily stopped in a state where three "5" production patterns 70a are aligned (symbol alignment), and a strong vibration production ( When the big hit determination vibration performance is started, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

After 4 seconds have passed, the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. When one second elapses from there, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resumes the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89(g), a re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, three "5" effect symbols 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned) and moved in the depth direction to be displayed in a reduced size, and the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) is generated, An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque performance button image imitating a performance button 17 emitting red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of an effective period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is displayed. is output, and the production button emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 89(h), promotion success effect is started. Specifically, the three "7" production patterns 70a switched from the "5" production pattern 70a that was displayed in reduced size are moved to the front side of the screen and enlarged and displayed in a state in which three are aligned (symbols are aligned). , the promotion sound effect is output. In addition, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors, and a strong vibration effect (elevated vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 3 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 89(i), when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the strong vibration effect is completed after the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at the normal size, a plurality of game boards are displayed. The decoration LED restarts the effect light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission), and the effect button 17 is turned off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 89(j), an eye-catching effect suggesting stop display of the effect symbol 70a is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, as shown in FIG. Along with being displayed, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are activated. It emits rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

When 1 second has passed from there, as shown in FIG. The symbol TZ is also permanently stopped at "777".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the first round game is started.

(Production example 2 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production and the jackpot is achieved)
90 and 91, an effect example 2 in the case where a big win is achieved by executing a determined effect during the SPSP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 16 will be described. Note that FIGS. 90(a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 88(a) to (c), so description thereof will be omitted here.

When the production button 17 is operated from the state of FIG. 90(c) or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. A temporary stop effect is performed at , and a big hit is notified by the effect pattern 70a, but the strong vibration effect is not performed at this point. At this time, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) continues.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. The game is temporarily stopped when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and production buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the success effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. A blessing production is started to bless the big hit while the light emission continues. Then, when the blessing effect is completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 91(g), an eye-catching effect suggesting stop display of the effect symbol 70a is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

Then, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, as shown in FIG. Along with being displayed, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are activated. It emits rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 91(i), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, and the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555". The symbol TZ is also permanently stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the big win game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period of the determined effect, or when the effective period passes and the determined failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the second movable member 73 is turned off. A failure effect image is displayed on the one-image display device 70, and a failure effect sound is output. Furthermore, part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are extinguished, and after that, the three effect symbols are temporarily stopped by the reach-losing result (for example, "565"). When a predetermined period elapses thereafter, an eye-catching performance suggesting stop display of the performance pattern 70a is executed, and when the eye-catching performance ends, the performance pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and is temporarily stopped. Then, the icon is redisplayed, and if there is a first special figure reservation number, the reservation icon is redisplayed. After one second has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is officially stopped with a reach-losing result, and the special symbol TZ is also fully-stopped with a reach-losing result.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, there is a case where the effective suggestive production is executed in the determined production, and in addition to the occurrence of the valid period, the expectation of the big win is high. can be suggested to the player, making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, there is a decided success production in which the first movable member 73 operates before the pattern matching and the first movable member 73 operates after the pattern matching. Since there is a determined success performance, the performance effect of the determined performance can be effectively improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, there is a decided success production in which the first movable member 73 operates before the pattern matching and the first movable member 73 operates after the pattern matching. In the decided success effect, the period from the operation of the effect button 17 to the execution of the vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) during the valid period is different. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration from the beginning, or to give the player an exhilaration after stirring up the anxiety of the player, and it is possible to effectively improve the amusement of the game by the contrast effect. .

88 to 91, the operation period (10 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the determined success effect and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration effect executed in the determined success effect are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the determined success production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game is a big win by means of the vibration effect, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the vibration production (decision success vibration production) executed during the decision production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). Display sound effect when displaying the promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and effect sound when operating the effect button 17 during the valid period (operation effect sound, success effect sound, movable member operating sound effect, etc.) ) is output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the decided success production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode not including characters are aligned (symbol alignment), the strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration) is temporarily stopped. Since the effect is executed, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the fact that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode including characters are aligned (C pattern alignment), strong vibration production (big hit confirmation vibration) is temporarily stopped. production) is to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reconfirm that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the vibration production (opening vibration production) executed at the time of the temporary stop or the opening of the jackpot game with three production patterns 70a aligned is the production button 17 effective period (display of the operation prompting image), the display sound effect when displaying the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period Sounds (operation sound effects, other sound effects, etc.) are not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the execution period of the vibration production executed at the time of the determined success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the plurality of game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the effective period related to the determined effect, but the effective period is determined by operating the effect button 17 immediately before or from the start of the effective period. Until the passage of time, some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs are extinguished, and in the case of executing a successful performance determined by the operation of the performance button 17 or the elapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned into a rainbow. It may be made to emit light. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 were designed to emit rainbow light at the time of the determined success effect. Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or while the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, some or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. may

In addition, when executing the decided success effect, the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start to emit rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start to emit rainbow light and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs. And the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started. may

In addition, after the end of the blessing effect, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off. The effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the re-lottery effect, the effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the eye-catching effect, or the rainbow light emission may be performed until the actual stop of the effect pattern 70a. may be continued.

In addition, when the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

Further, when the SPSP ready-to-win production is executed, the production pattern 70a is finally stopped after the eye-catching production and the production of returning the display mode of the production pattern 70a to the display mode including the character. However, when the result of the SPSP ready-to-win production results in a failure, the production pattern 70a is finally stopped after the eye-catching production or the production of returning the display mode of the production pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, In the case of a big hit, the production pattern 70a may be permanently stopped in the display mode of only numbers without executing the eye-catching production or the production of returning the display mode of the production pattern 70a to the display mode including the character. .

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the decision success effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 3 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, although the vibration performance is executed at the time of the decision success performance or the promotion success performance, the vibration performance may be executed at the time of the decision success performance, and the vibration performance may not be executed at the time of the promotion success performance, Conversely, the vibration performance may not be executed during the determined success performance and the promotion success performance.

In addition, a vibration effect is executed at the time of a temporary stop of a big win due to the effect pattern 70a with only numbers after the blessing effect or a temporary stop of the big win due to the effect pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching effect. However, the vibration performance is executed at the time of temporary stop of the big winning eye by the performance pattern 70a with only numbers after the blessing performance, and the vibration performance is executed at the time of temporary stop of the big winning eye by the performance pattern 70a including the character after the eye-catching performance. It may be set so that it may not be performed, or vice versa, and at the time of temporary stop of the big hit by the performance pattern 70a with only numbers after the blessing performance and the big win by the performance pattern 70a including the character after the eye-catching performance. Vibration performance may not be executed at the time of temporary stop of .

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (even during the final effect, the icon before the winning entrance lamp NR is hidden is displayed. It emits light in a color corresponding to the display mode), but it may be made to emit light and extinguish in conjunction with the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Production example when a special SP reach production is executed in production mode A (normal game state) and becomes a big hit)
With reference to FIG. 92, a description will be given of an effect example in which a special SP ready-to-win effect is executed in the effect mode A (normal game state) to result in a big win.

First, as shown in FIG. 92(a), the image display device 70 is in a state in which the performance symbol 70a of "635" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "2" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. At this time, since the effect mode is A (normal game state), the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed.

When the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 92(b), the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F changes from "2" to "1" Change. Although the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the icon may be displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(c), a development effect suggesting development to a special SP ready-to-win effect is executed, and a special SP ready-to-win effect is executed.

Then, when the special SP ready-to-win production ends, as shown in FIG. 92(d), the production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at "555", and the special pattern TZ is also permanently stopped at "555", resulting in the second variation. The performance ends.

After the end of the second variable effect, as shown in FIG. 92(e), the opening effect of the big win game is started, and the big win effect 1 is executed. Incidentally, when the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variation effect, the jackpot effect 2 is executed.

(Production example when special SP reach production is executed in production mode G (specific game state) and becomes a big hit)
With reference to FIG. 93, a description will be given of an effect example in which a special SP ready-to-win effect is executed in the effect mode G (specific game state) to result in a big hit.

First, as shown in FIG. 93(a), the image display device 70 is in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "285" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E. At this time, since it is the production mode G (specific game state), the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed.

When the first variable effect is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 93(b), the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". Although the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the icon may be displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(c), a development effect suggesting development to a special SP ready-to-win effect is executed, and a special SP ready-to-win effect is executed.

Then, when the special SP ready-to-win effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 93(d), the effect symbol 70a is officially stopped at "555", and the special symbol TZ is also officially stopped at "555", resulting in the first variation. The performance ends.

After the end of the first variable effect, as shown in FIG. 93(e), the opening effect of the big win game is started, and the big win effect 1 is executed. Incidentally, when the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variation effect, the jackpot effect 2 is executed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the specific game state, the case where the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, and the second fluctuation production (second Variable display of special symbols) is executed, different aspects (whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed, whether or not various advance notice effects are executed, whether or not there is a specific reach effect, whether or not the icon is displayed, the type of background image , type of BGM, etc.), but the jackpot effect after the first variation effect in the specific game state and the jackpot effect after the second variation effect in the specific game state have a common aspect (background image, BGM , round effect image, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, during the jackpot performance, the player does not have to be conscious of whether the first variation performance is the trigger or the second variation performance is the trigger, so that the player can enjoy the jackpot performance without bringing in extra thoughts. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, in the normal game state, the case where the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed and the case where the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed are different aspects. Effect can be executed by (whether or not prefetch effect is executed, whether or not various notice effects are executed, whether or not specific reach effect is executed, whether or not the icon is displayed, the type of background image, the type of BGM, etc.), and the normal game state The jackpot performance after the first variation performance and the jackpot performance after the second variation performance in the normal game state may be performed in a common mode (background image, BGM, round performance image, etc.). In this way, the player does not have to be conscious of whether the first variation performance is the trigger or the second variation performance is the trigger during the big win performance, so that the player can enjoy the big win performance without bringing in extra thoughts. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Production example when the variable mission production is executed during the jackpot)
With reference to FIG. 94, an example of an effect when a variable probability mission effect is executed to determine whether or not a variable probability game state is entered during a big hit (round game) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 94(a), when the opening effect of the jackpot game is started, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17 ) is started, the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration performance ends, the opening performance of the jackpot game ends, and the first round game starts.

After that, when the interval period after the first round game ends and the second round game is started, as shown in FIG. is started, and the words ``Defeat the enemy and the odds change'' are displayed until the second round game is completed.

Then, when the interval period after the second round game ends and the third round game is started, as shown in FIG. The variable mission production will start. Specifically, the text "destroy" is displayed, and an operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed. , the display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light. At this time, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) continues.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, a mission success effect is started as shown in FIG. 94(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (elevated vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds, and part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

After that, when the mission success effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 94(e), the characters "defeat" indicating that the mission is successful are displayed, and the effect button 17 finishes emitting rainbow light, and a plurality of game boards are displayed. The effect light emission of the decoration LED is restarted, and when the third round game is completed, the characters of "defeat" are erased and the round effect is restarted.

Then, when the ninth round game is started, as shown in FIG. At least 11 seconds from the start until 5 seconds have passed) occurs, and the mode selection effect for selecting the effect mode in the variable probability game state is started. Specifically, the option image of the production mode D and the option image of the production mode E are displayed, and as the operation prompting image, "Please select the mode in which the probability is changing with the cross key and press the button!" An opaque effect button image imitating the luminous effect button 17 is displayed.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 94(g), the option image of the effect mode D is selected (the option image of the effect mode E is displayed in a dark color). , the option image of the effect mode E is selected (the option image of the effect mode D is displayed in a dark color).

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. It is informed that it becomes E, and the mode selection effect is completed. After that, when the 10th round game ends, the ending effect is executed, and when the ending effect ends, the variable probability game state is started.

When the mission failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the failure effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the failure effect sound is output. . Furthermore, the mode selection effect is not executed, and the ending effect is entered.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIG. 94, the operation period (5 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the mission success production, and the execution period of the vibration production (elevation vibration production) executed during the mission success production. (5 seconds) are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the mission success production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the vibration effect is advantageous to the player, that is, that a variable probability state will occur, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 94, the vibration production (elevation vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17. ) is output, and a presentation sound (success sound effect) is output when the presentation button 17 is operated during the valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the decided success production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 94, the execution period of the vibration production (elevation vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 94, even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 is operated during the mode selection effect, the vibration effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the selected production mode has a higher expectation for a big win than the non-selected production mode, and to improve the interest of the game. becomes. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised, and to avoid the inconvenience of giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

In addition, while the valid period related to the probability variable mission effect is occurring, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are designed to continue the effect light emission. Until elapses, some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs are extinguished, and when executing the mission success effect by operating the effect button 17 or the elapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. Rainbow light may be emitted. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 were designed to emit rainbow light during the mission success effect. Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or while the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, some or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. may

In addition, when executing the mission success effect, the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start to emit rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start to emit rainbow light and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs. And the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started. may

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the mission success effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 3 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect may be variable).

Moreover, although the vibration presentation is executed at the time of the mission success presentation, the vibration presentation may not be performed at the time of the mission success presentation.

(Example of effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
95 and 96, a description will be given of an example of an effect when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), when the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, "728 ” is stop-displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

Here, the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a red icon to start the icon change effect, and along with this, the winning hole lamp NR flashes red from the state of being extinguished. By changing to the state, the lamp change effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(c), while the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped display) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a which has been variably displayed, the central variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 95(d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased together with the pending icon.

After that, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 95(e), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C displaying the icon is erased together with the icon. At this time, the prize-winning lamp NR is not turned off as the icon is erased, and the lamp change effect of the prize-winning lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the winning hole lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 95(f).

After that, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is resumed, the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "Reading" as shown in FIG. maintained.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. is displayed during the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win performance (including the execution period of the re-lottery performance to determine whether the temporarily stopped jackpot performance symbols are promoted to the jackpot performance symbols of higher value for the player). However, here too, the win-win lamp NR remains turned off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win production that becomes a loss ends (the production control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a loss), the temporary stop display of the production pattern 70a ( A stop screen (second standby screen) in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed without performing shaking fluctuation). , the variable performance ends without restarting the ramp change performance.

At this time, the same white icon as before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the square icon is displayed. By displaying the area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 96(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started and displayed on the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2. The first pending icon (white icon) that has been displayed is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG. ``777'' jackpot effect pattern 70a that suggests the type of the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing swing fluctuation/swing display) (formed the reach state before power off) A combination of production patterns different from the reach combination by the production patterns of 3 ↓ 3”), and a stop screen with the special pattern TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and a lamp change effect is displayed at the winning entrance lamp NR. The variable performance ends without restarting.

In addition to the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variable performances (variation performance in which normal variation is performed, variable performance in which shortened variation is performed, variable performance in which normal reach performance is performed, SP reach performance is executed), when the power supply that was stopped during the execution is resumed and the execution period of the effect ends, the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation/swing display) of the effect symbol 70a is not performed and " 753", or a combination of the same production pattern as the ready-to-win combination by the production pattern that formed the ready-to-win state before the power was cut off, or a combination of different production patterns, which is a stop display (static display). will be

Also, with regard to the special symbol TZ, whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, whether the state after that is the normal game state or the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) Regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol TZ, the same display mode (shape, design) will be stop-displayed (stationary display) with numbers that are in the same combination as the effect symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 96(l), information indicating the type of the jackpot game ("MAX jackpot" indicating that it is the first jackpot game) is displayed on the image display device. An opening effect is started, and the first reserved icon display area 70B, the second reserved icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

In addition, while the initial screen and/or the returning screen are displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot) ) to turn on the winning entrance lamp NR.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the variable production that is stopped and displayed after the production design 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking fluctuation) is restarted. After the game control state is restored, the special symbol fluctuation time has passed and the special symbol stop designation command (if the special symbol stop designation command is missed and the state is shifted to the customer waiting state after that, the customer waiting state designation command) is received, the production design 70a is stop-displayed (stationary display) without the temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation/swing display) of the production design 70a. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (still display) after the power supply stopped during execution of the loss variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When it is done, the combination of the production design which is the initial design at the time of power restoration is stopped (still displayed) instead of the normal losing production design. Therefore, there is no need to perform complicated processing such as determining the stop display (static display) effect pattern by lottery. It is possible to grasp that the variable performance that has been performed has ended.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the production pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed) after the power supply stopped during execution of the big hit variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When there is, the combination of the jackpot production pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed). Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the control state of the game is the restoration of the power supply, and that the variation performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped was the jackpot variation performance.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, after the game control state is restored, when the combination of the jackpot production pattern is displayed (still displayed), the reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (stationary display) a combination of big hit production patterns different from the reach combination by the production pattern that was used. Therefore, there is no need to be conscious of the jackpot performance symbols that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, when the execution period of the promotion production described above is included in the variation production that was being executed when the power supply was stopped, the power supply is restarted and the control is performed. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed) without executing the promotion effect. Therefore, since no useless effect is performed until the effect pattern is stopped (stationary display), the player is immediately notified that the variable effect being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped was the big hit variable effect. It is possible to grasp the

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the losing variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and when the jackpot fluctuation production is executed, it is stopped. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after the power supply is restarted is the same as when the power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored. Therefore, simple display control can be performed without being conscious of whether the losing variation effect is being executed or the big win variation effect is being executed, and the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted. can be reduced.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the special symbols TZ are displayed in the same manner as before the power supply is stopped after the power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. Then, the numbers that are the same combination as the production pattern 70a are stop-displayed (still-displayed). Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped has ended.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, when the power supply that was stopped during the display of the icon is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is finished, and then the next operation is performed. Until the variable effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) is started, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is changed to a background image or the like. The effect image is secured in a displayable state, but the icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, when the stopped power supply is resumed while the pending icon is being displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is finished, and then the next operation is performed. Until the variable effect starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the suspended icon display area, so that the suspended icon display space (display area) can display the effect image such as the background image. It is now reserved and has a pending icon. Therefore, even when the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the suspended variable performance is not extinguished, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the variation production corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production (the lighting color (blue, red , Rainbow) When the stopped power supply is resumed during the storage of the special figure determination information to be changed to the rainbow) and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR is hit big without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (extinguishing or white lighting) is set so as not to suggest the degree of winning expectation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not executed.

After the end of the execution period of the big hit variation effect, the stop screen in which the big win effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped is displayed. A second standby screen may be displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed).

Also, after the execution period of the big hit variation performance is over, the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stop-displayed is displayed, but the stop screen is not displayed and the jackpot performance pattern 70a is displayed. You may start the opening effect of the jackpot game in which is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening effect, a jackpot special pattern TZ of "777" may be displayed, or a special pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, may be displayed. TZ may be displayed.

Further, after the execution period of the loss variation performance is over, the performance symbol 70a which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the big win variation performance is over, the big win is performed. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed.

In addition, when it is made possible to execute a specific effect of inciting whether or not the big win game is executed without displaying the ready-to-win state effect symbol 70a in the variable effect (makes people expect that the big win game is executed), the specific effect After the power supply stopped during execution of the performance is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) in the case of a loss, and in the case of a big win. You may make it stop-display (still display) the big hit production|presentation pattern 70a.

Further, when the combination of the jackpot performance symbols is stopped (still displayed) after the game control state is recovered, one of the combinations of the plurality of jackpot performance symbols corresponding to the type of the jackpot game to be executed thereafter. may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is “333” and “777”, and the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is “222” and “ 444", "666" and "888", and the combination of the jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is "111", "555" and "999".

Then, when the ready-to-win combination before the power supply is stopped is "1↓1" constituting a part of the combination of the jackpot performance symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game, the jackpot game to be executed after that is the first jackpot game. In the case of a jackpot game, one of ``333'' and ``777'' (a combination of jackpot performance symbols different from the ready-to-win combination of the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) is stopped and displayed, and then executed. When the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, any one of ``111'', ``555'' and ``999'' (a combination of jackpot performance symbols that are the same as or different from the ready-to-win combination by the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) should be stopped.

In addition, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the special symbol TZ is not stopped (still displayed) with a number that is the same combination as the production pattern 70a, but is a combination different from the production pattern 70a. You may make it stop display (still display) with a number.

Further, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, when the normal game state and the customer waiting state are displayed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed), while the power supply is stopped. When the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) and customer waiting state are after the restart and the control state is restored, stop display (stationary display) of the production pattern 70a, The special symbol TZ may be stopped (still displayed).

(An example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect)
FIGS. 97 and 98 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 97(a), the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the losing effect symbol 70a of "728" is stop-displayed when the player is on.

After that, when the variable effect that is the preliminary change is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the third display portion 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display portion 70B1, and the second display portion 70B2.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the first effect of the look-ahead effect effect is started, and the first pending icon ( The final display mode of the icon (= red icon) is changed to a blue icon to start the pending icon change effect, and along with this, the winning entrance lamp NR changes from an off state to a blue flashing state. A change production is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97(c), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 97(d), after the production pattern 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss production pattern 70a of "259" and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed. .

After that, when the variable effect as the preliminary change is started, as shown in FIG. 97(e), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the The displayed first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the second look-ahead effect effect is started, and the pending icon change effect and the lamp change effect are continued. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 97(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the winning hole lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 97(g).

After that, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. To maintain the turned-off state without resuming the change performance.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. is displayed over the execution period of the pre-variation, but the win-win lamp NR remains turned off here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the advance variation ends (the production control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. Without performing, the stop screen in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the lamp change production is restarted without restarting. Fluctuation ends.

At this time, the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B displays a white icon that is not the blue icon before the power supply is stopped, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. By displaying the rectangular area image, the display space (display area) for the icon is secured in such a manner that the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 98(k), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first 1 pending icon (white icon) is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, when a lottery for the newly executed icon change effect is won, the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a blue icon according to the result, and the icon change is displayed. The performance begins. On the other hand, since the lottery relating to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the lamp change effect is not restarted while the prize winning entrance lamp NR is kept turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 98(l), the words uttered by ally A are displayed in the words window displayed on the image display device, and a voice corresponding to the words from the voice output device 9, "Your chance is here!" is displayed, the dialog announcement effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 98(m), while the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the center variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 98(n), SP reach effect is started, effect pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size at the upper left of the screen, first pending icon display area 70B, and second The pending icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 98(o), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a big hit), as shown in FIG. A jackpot performance pattern 70a of ``333'' suggesting the type of one jackpot game) and a special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking fluctuation), then stop-displayed, and the variable performance ends.

In addition, while the initial screen and/or the returning screen are displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot) ) to turn on the winning entrance lamp NR.

In addition, when the special figure stop designation command cannot be received during the fluctuation production (temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a), the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) production pattern 70a is not displayed. , the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) is continued.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the power supply stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure stored at the time of restoration The continuous announcement effect is not restarted in the variable effect corresponding to the determination information. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the performance progresses while the announcement target of the continuous announcement performance is unknown due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that the same applies to the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of another continuous advance notice effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the reserved icon displayed as a special icon (including the case where it has not changed until the final display mode and the case where it has changed until the final display mode). When the power supply stopped during icon display is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the suspended icon displayed as the special icon is displayed as the normal icon. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the icon change production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration In the variable effect corresponding to , the pending icon change effect is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the icon change effect due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, during the execution of the variation production corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration, even if the icon change production is executed again, The continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply was cut off is no longer executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change effect in accordance with the contents of the current variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the variable production corresponding to the holding icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production (the lighting color (blue, red , Rainbow) Even if the power supply stopped during the storage of the special figure determination information to be changed to the rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the lamp change effect is not restarted. The lamp NR is set to a notification mode (extinguished or lit in white) that does not suggest the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not executed.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a production lever device 23 is provided in addition to the production button 17 as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment. Note that description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 99, a production lever device 23 functioning as an input device is provided on the central bottom side portion of the upper plate 11 so as to form the front and back of the production button device 16 .
The performance lever device 23 is provided on the central bottom surface side of the upper plate 11 so as to form the front and back of the performance button device 16, and the performance lever 24 that the player can pull toward the front side and the performance lever 24. and a lever vibration motor (not shown) for vibrating the effect lever 24 are provided. Predetermined information can be input to 1.

Since the effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibrations move the upper plate 11 to serve as a transmission member. It is transmitted to the production lever 24 via. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor for vibrating the production lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the production button 17 via the upper plate 11.例文帳に追加In other words, when the player is operating one of the operation parts by hand, the other operation part is vibrated (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut When the vibration effect with/without the effective period of the operation unit related to the in effect, the final effect, the re-lottery effect, the final effect, etc.) is executed, the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand via the other operation part. It is designed to be

In addition, since the effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11 attached to the glass frame 4, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibration acts as a transmission member. It is also transmitted to the firing handle via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4 that fulfill the function. Furthermore, when a lever vibration motor for vibrating the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4. - 特許庁

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a determined effect pattern in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 100, the determined effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the determined effect pattern to be selected. , and for reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, valid period, effect content) of each determined effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestion effect" is an introduction effect that suggests that the effective period may occur. This is an effect in which the transparent effect lever image is moved and displayed on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button image and the semi-transparent effect lever image are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the final effect ends when the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is operated once or 5 seconds elapse.

The "operation target" in the effective period column indicates the type of operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) whose operation is valid during the effective period. The operation becomes effective, and if it is the "production lever", the operation of the production lever 24 becomes effective.
The "promoting effect" is a effect that prompts the user to operate the operation unit (the effect button 17, the effect lever 24) during the valid period, and specifically, the effective suggesting effect is not executed or the effective suggesting effect is executed. As a result, an opaque effect button image or an opaque effect lever image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and that emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a projecting state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Normal lever" indicates that an effect lever image imitating the effect lever 24 of a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image described above.
“Large lever rainbow” indicates that an effect lever image simulating the effect lever 24 larger than a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image described above.

"Operation unit state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) during the effective period. If there is, it is a normal state that does not protrude, and "protrusion" indicates that if the target operation unit is the production button 17, it is in a protruding state. In addition, since the production lever 24 does not have a protruding state, it is only in a normal state.

"Failure" in the column of the determined effect mode means that the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color, thereby indicating that the jackpot game is not executed. is executed.
“Success” means that the first movable member 73 operates to the maximum operating position and emits light in rainbow colors, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. It indicates that a successful production that is determined to suggest is executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the column of button vibration is determined by the vibrator for vibrating the effect button 17, and when the successful effect starts (=when the effect button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends) It shows that a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second after the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is determined from the start of the successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that the rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the effect button 17 strongly vibrates). Even if the operation target is the production lever 24, the production button 17 emits rainbow light.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is "normal button white" < "protruding button red" < "normal lever" < "protruding button rainbow" = "large lever rainbow". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each operation unit state is "normal" < "protruding".

As a first feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is that the effective period is generated over the longest period as the effective period generated during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is that the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 vibrates for the longest period of time as the strong vibration effect that occurs during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of the winning performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the vibrating period of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 . Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is finished, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, all the three production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (shake motion), but the left and right production patterns 70a are stopped and the central production Only the pattern 70a may be temporarily stopped (shaking motion). At this time, all the three production patterns 70a may perform a fluctuation action (production action), or the left and right production patterns 70a do not fluctuate (production action), and only the central production pattern 70a fluctuates (production action). ).

Further, in the present embodiment, the tactile image SK and the design effect image ZE, which constitute the decorative portion, fluctuate during the temporary stop of the performance design 70a. Only one of the above may perform the fluctuation motion (effect motion).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the identification unit composed of the hexagonal base image and the number portion (identification character) does not perform the fluctuation operation (production operation) when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. A texture (surface pattern, etc.) may be made to perform a fluctuation action (drawing action), or a fluctuation action (drawing action) may be performed by adding a light emission effect to the identification section.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the performance design 70a is designed to swing up and down as a temporary stop of the performance design 70a, but the performance design 70a may be expanded and contracted. In this case, when the start command is received during the temporary stop, the production pattern 70a is shifted from the stop position in the direction of shrinking (smaller than the normal size) and in the direction of expanding (smaller than the normal size). large), it should be normal size and displayed at the stop position.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a. You may make it fluctuate|move like this. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the decorative part or number part is out of the base image, it will fit within the base image and be displayed at the stop position. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state (time saving game state, variable probability game state), since the production pattern 70a is composed only of the number part (identification character), the decoration part fluctuates during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. The performance pattern 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decorative part consisting of a pattern effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. You may make it fluctuate motion (drawing motion).

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a were not mentioned, but during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the frame lighting device At least one of the plurality of light emitting units that constitute 10 may be in the same mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change and movement than during fluctuation). , At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the board illumination device 76 is set to the same light emission mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission with less change and movement than during fluctuation) mode, extinguished). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76 changes (switches) to a lighting mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the production pattern 70a of the losing mode is finally stopped, the special pattern TZ is stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), but the same number as the production pattern 70a The main stop may be made in such a failure mode. In addition, when the production pattern 70a of the jackpot mode is actually stopped, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode ("333"). You may make it stop.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a (special figure pending number specification command, special design specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) production control unit When 130m receives, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ is continued, but it is also possible to start the variable display after instantaneously deriving display in the same way as the effect symbol 70a. good. In this case, as for the special symbols TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbols TZ deviated from the predetermined stop position at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start command or the customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation. It may be shorter than the 10 frames required for erasing the icon TI upon receipt of the command, the 20 frames required for shift display of the pending icon HI, and the 10 frames required for additional display of the pending icon. You may do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the command at the start is received during the display of the number of pending icons larger than the number of special figure pending, the surplus pending icon HI is erased by one frame worth of non-animation. However, the number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TI, 20 frames for shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames for additional display of the hold icon based on the reception of the stop command. It may be erased by animation for 5 frames.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start when the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, so that the number of special figures reserved and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is an inconsistency (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the increasing direction) due to command abnormality between the special figure pending number that was grasped), one more than the predetermined number After displaying a large number of pending icons, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. can be

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start when the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, so that the number of special figures reserved and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is a mismatch (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the increasing direction) due to command abnormality between the special figure pending number that was grasped), reception of this command at the start However, the icon may not be displayed during the variable performance executed in response to the reception of the command at the start.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal icon is a white icon regardless of the type of production mode. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of production mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed according to the type of production mode or game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is changed according to the type of effect mode or game state, the action mode (mode of effect action) during the variable effect is changed according to the form of the normal icon. good too. Furthermore, even when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is changed according to the type of the effect mode or the game state, the mode of action (mode of the effect action) during the variable effect can be changed according to the form of the special icon. good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect. A specific icon suggesting that a ready-to-win effect (for example, an SP ready-to-win effect or an SPSP ready-to-win effect) is executed may be provided. In this case, the form of the special icon and the specific icon and the mode of the effect action should be different from the form of the normal icon and the special icon and the mode of the effect action.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reservation icon is displayed when both the prefetching designation command of the special figure reservation number designation command as the winning command is normally received, but the special figure reservation number designation command is received If you do not receive the prefetch designation command normally, you will display a pending icon, while if you do not receive the special figure hold number designation command normally and you will receive the prefetch designation command normally, display the pending icon You may choose not to do so, or vice versa. In addition, when receiving only one of the special figure pending number designation command and the look-ahead designation command and displaying the pending icon, the icon change effect for this pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode cannot be changed by operating the effect button 17 by the player, but the effect mode may be changed by operating the effect button 17.例文帳に追加In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a based on the command abnormality that the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the operation for changing the production mode is not accepted, that is, the production button 17 It is preferable to regulate the change of the production mode based on the operation of .

Further, in the present embodiment, the pending icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the pending icon is displayed as a button icon prompting the operation of the effect button 17, In response to the operation of the effect button 17 during display of the button icon for which is valid, an operation change effect of changing the button icon to any of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon may be executed. . In this case, in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 is changed at a predetermined rate from the first operation mode (non-vibrating, non-projecting state at the standby position) to the second operating mode (vibrating, projecting state at the effect position). You may do so. In this case, the production button 17 is changed from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-described speech announcement effect and final effect, rather than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect. The rate of change should be higher.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the effect button image executed in the effective suggestive effect is semi-transparent, but the effect button image may be an outline-only effect button image instead of a translucent effect, or may be a silhouette-only effect button image. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) when the advance notice effect (dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect) and the development effect are executed. However, the glass frame 4 may be provided with a frame movable member, and when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed in the pre-reach announcement effect or the development effect, the motion effect of operating the frame movable member may be executed. Instead of the vibration effect, an action effect for moving the frame movable member may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 17 at the time of execution of the advance notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, final effect) or when the symbols are aligned. Alternatively, a frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and an action performance may be executed by operating the frame movable member when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed when the patterns are aligned, or instead of the vibration performance. An action effect for moving the frame movable member may be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the title display indicating that the reach effect is being performed is not performed during the execution of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect. The title may be displayed using either red characters that have a higher expectation of winning than white characters, rainbow characters that confirm the big hit, etc.), and after the title display is displayed in white characters, it changes to red characters or rainbow characters. You can let it run.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the cut-in production is performed at the end of the SP reach production, but it is performed in the middle (first period) or the end (second period) of the SP reach production, and the SP reach production is performed. Even if the production button 17 is more likely to be in a protruding state (proportion of protruding state is higher) in the case of performing the cut-in performance at the end of the SP reach performance than in the case of performing the cut-in performance in the middle stage. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an effective period for long-pressing the production button 17 is generated in the development performance, but an effective period for long-pressing the performance button 17 is generated as a jackpot announcement performance other than the development performance. At the same time, it may be possible to execute an operation progress effect that progresses the effect according to the long-pressing period during the effective period. In this case, it is preferable to determine that the long press continues at a plurality of determination timings in the effective period, and to determine to what stage the effect is to be developed based on the determination results.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the action of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and/or the second temporary stop production pattern 70 is used to incite whether or not the reach is reached. was not executed, but it is also possible to execute a reach-inciting effect. In this case, in the normal game state, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, the reach-flavor effect can be executed, while the second variation effect (fluctuation of the second special symbol) display) is executed, the ready-to-win effect is not executed, or it may be made to be less likely to be executed than the first variable effect (performed rate is low), and in the specific game state, the second variable effect When (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the ready-to-win effect can be executed, while when the first variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the reach-to-win effect is performed. The effect may not be executed, or may be less likely to be executed (performed at a lower rate) than the second variable effect.

(Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the starting condition, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and a gaming machine that executes a variable effect according to the result of the determination. is common. In such a gaming machine, the interest in the game is enhanced by performing various effects in the variable effects (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, in the gaming machine as described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the variable presentation, and there is a problem that the game lacks interest.

◆ The first invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A state control means (main control board 110) that controls to control, a first variation performance is executed according to the determination result of the first determination means, and a second variation performance is executed according to the determination result of the second determination means. and a performance control means (performance control board 130), wherein the performance control means executes the first variable performance and the second variable performance in any one of a plurality of variable performance patterns, and the specific game state The variable performance pattern executed when the second variable performance resulting in a loss result is executed during the specific game state rather than the case where the first variable performance resulting in a loss result is executed during the specific game state. There are many types of Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The second invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A state control means (main control board 110) that controls to control, a first variation performance is executed according to the determination result of the first determination means, and a second variation performance is executed according to the determination result of the second determination means. and a performance control means (performance control board 130), wherein the performance control means executes the first variable performance and the second variable performance in any one of a plurality of variable performance patterns, and the normal game state The case where the first variation performance resulting in a loss result is executed during the specific game state is the same variation performance pattern as compared to the case where the first variation performance resulting in a loss result is executed during the specific game state. The first variation performance is easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The third invention for solving the above problems is an operation means (production button 17, cross key 19) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. And, the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port), and the second starting condition A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (winning of the game ball to the second start port), a normal game state, and the normal game state A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a first variable effect is executed according to the determination result of the first determination means. and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a second variable production according to the determination result of the second judgment means, wherein the production control means controls the variation according to the operation of the operation means. A production element (production mode, BGM, sound volume, amount of light, etc.) used for production can be changed to any of a plurality of production elements, and during execution of the first variable production in the specific game state, the second variation The production element used for production can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A fourth invention for solving the above problems is an operation means (production button 17, cross key 19) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. And, the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port), and the second starting condition A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (winning of the game ball to the second start port), a normal game state, and the normal game state A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a first variable effect is executed according to the determination result of the first determination means. and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a second variable production according to the determination result of the second judgment means, wherein the production control means controls the variation according to the operation of the operation means. A production element (production mode, BGM, sound volume, amount of light, etc.) used for production can be changed to any one of a plurality of production elements, and during execution of the second variable production in the specific game state, the first variation The production element used for production can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The fifth invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, and according to the determination result of the first determination means, execute the first variable effect with variable display of the effect symbol, and according to the determination result of the second determination means and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a second variable production accompanied by a variable display of production patterns, and the production control means performs a predetermined production (pre-variation operation, look-ahead effect production, etc.) in the variable production. ) is executed, the performance symbols can be variably displayed, and the first variable performance is executed during the normal game state and the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state. The rate at which the predetermined effect is executed is different between when it is executed and when it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The sixth invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, wherein ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, and according to the determination result of the first determination means, execute the first variable effect with variable display of the effect symbol, and according to the determination result of the second determination means and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a second variable production accompanied by a variable display of production patterns, and the production control means performs a predetermined production (pre-variation operation, look-ahead effect production, etc.) in the variable production. ) is executed, and then the performance symbols can be variably displayed, and the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state, and the second variable performance is executed during the specific game state. The rate at which the predetermined effect is executed is different between when it is executed and when it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The seventh invention for solving the above problems is an operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) operable by the player in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. And, the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port), and the second starting condition A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (winning of the game ball to the second start port), a normal game state, and the normal game state A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display of the production pattern according to the determination result of the first determination means. a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a first variable production accompanied by a first variable production and executing a second variable production accompanied by a variable display of production patterns according to the determination result of the second determination means, wherein the production The control means generates an effective period during execution of the first variable effect or the second variable effect, and an operation effect (speech announcement effect) that performs a predetermined effect in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the effective period. , pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) can be executed, and during the specific game state, it is possible to execute the first variable effect that results in a loss during the normal game state. It is more difficult to execute the operation effect when the first variable effect, which results in a losing result, is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 8th-1 invention for solving the above problem is a game machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever) that can be operated by the player. 24), first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port); A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), a normal game state, and the normal game A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the state, and variation of the production pattern according to the determination result of the first determination means. Effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes a first variable effect with display and executes a second variable effect with variable display of effect symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means, The effect control means generates an effective period during the execution of the first variable effect, and performs an operation effect (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect) according to the operation of the operation means during the effective period. , development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) can be executed, and in the first variable effect, the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect). The specific variable performance that is a special result is executed during the specific game state more than the case where the specific variable performance that is a special result is executed during the normal game state. In this case, it is more difficult to execute the operation effect during the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the 8-2nd invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and an operation means (a production button 17, a production Lever 24), first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port); 2 second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), the normal game state, and the normal A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the game state, and a production pattern according to the determination result of the first determination means. a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a first variable performance with variable display and executing a second variable performance with variable display of performance symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means. The effect control means generates an effective period during execution of the first variable effect, and provides an operation effect (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect) for performing a predetermined effect in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the effective period. production, development production, cut-in production, decision production, etc.) can be executed, and the specific game state is more likely than the case where the first variation production that is a special result (jackpot result) is executed during the normal game state. The number of times of execution of the operation presentation is likely to decrease when the first variable presentation, which is a special result, is executed during the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The ninth invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, and according to the determination result of the first determination means, execute the first variable effect with variable display of the effect symbol, and according to the determination result of the second determination means and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a second variable production accompanied by a variable display of production patterns, wherein the production control means is during execution of the first variable production or the second variable production. In addition to generating an effective period, it is possible to execute an operation effect (such as a dialogue announcement effect, a simulated continuous effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a final effect, etc.) that performs a predetermined effect in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the effective period. , and the case where the second variable effect that results in a loss is executed during the specific game state is better than the case where the first variable effect that results in a loss is executed during the specific game state. The operation effect is easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 10th-1 invention for solving the above problem is a game machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever) that can be operated by the player. 24), first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port); A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), a normal game state, and the normal game A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the state, and variation of the production pattern according to the determination result of the first determination means. Effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes a first variable effect with display and executes a second variable effect with variable display of effect symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means, The effect control means generates an effective period during the execution of the first variable effect or the second variable effect, and an operation effect (line) that performs a predetermined effect according to the operation of the operation means during the effective period. announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) can be executed, and in the first variable effect, the second effect (post-reach effect) is performed after the first effect (pre-reach effect) ) is executed, and the second variable production includes a second production (post-reach production) that is executed after the first production (pre-reach production). Including 2 specific variation performance (reach variation performance), the second specific that becomes a special result during the specific game state than the case where the first specific variation performance that becomes a special result during the specific game state is executed The operation performance is more likely to be executed during the first performance when the variable performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the tenth-2 invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Lever 24), first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port); 2 second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), the normal game state, and the normal A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the game state, and a production pattern according to the determination result of the first determination means. a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a first variable performance with variable display and executing a second variable performance with variable display of performance symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means. , the effect control means generates an effective period during execution of the first variable effect or the second variable effect, and an operation effect ( dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) can be executed, and the specific game state is more likely than the case where the first variable effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific game state. The number of times of execution of the operation effect tends to increase when the second variable effect as a special result is executed during the game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The eleventh invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) operable by the player in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. And, the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port), and the second starting condition A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (winning of the game ball to the second start port), a normal game state, and the normal game state A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display of the production pattern according to the determination result of the first determination means. a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a first variable production accompanied by a first variable production and executing a second variable production accompanied by a variable display of production patterns according to the determination result of the second determination means, wherein the production The control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the first variable effect or the second variable effect (at the time of anticipation vibration effect, at the time of dialogue notice effect, at the time of step-up notice effect, at the time of pseudo continuous effect, development Vibration performance during performance, cut-in performance, etc.) can be executed, and the loss result during the specific game state is more likely than the case where the first variable performance that results in the loss during the normal game state is executed. When the first fluctuation effect is executed, the vibration effect is more difficult to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 12th-1 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever) that can be operated by the player. 24), first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port); A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), a normal game state, and the normal game A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the state, and variation of the production pattern according to the determination result of the first determination means. Effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes a first variable effect with display and executes a second variable effect with variable display of effect symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means, The effect control means is configured to vibrate the operation means during execution of the first variable effect or the second variable effect (at the time of anticipation vibration effect, at the time of dialogue notice effect, at the time of step-up notice effect, at the time of pseudo continuous effect) etc.) can be executed, and in the first variation production, the second production (post-reach production) is executed after the first production (pre-reach production). production), and the case where the first specific variation production that becomes a special result is executed during the specific game state rather than the case where the first specific fluctuation production that becomes a special result is executed during the normal game state. is more difficult to execute the vibration effect during the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the 12-2 invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and an operation means (a production button 17, a production Lever 24), first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port); 2 second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), the normal game state, and the normal A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the game state, and a production pattern according to the determination result of the first determination means. a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a first variable performance with variable display and executing a second variable performance with variable display of performance symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means. , the effect control means vibrates the operation means during the execution of the first variable effect or the second variable effect (at the time of anticipation vibration effect, at the time of dialogue notice effect, at the time of step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect Vibration performance such as time) can be executed, and the first variation performance that becomes a special result during the specific game state is more likely than the case where the first variation performance that becomes a special result is executed during the normal game state. is executed, the number of times the vibration effect is executed tends to decrease. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A thirteenth invention for solving the above problems is an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. And, the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port), and the second starting condition A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (winning of the game ball to the second start port), a normal game state, and the normal game state A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display of the production pattern according to the determination result of the first determination means. a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a first variable production accompanied by a first variable production and executing a second variable production accompanied by a variable display of production patterns according to the determination result of the second determination means, wherein the production The control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the first variable effect or the second variable effect (at the time of anticipation vibration effect, at the time of dialogue notice effect, at the time of step-up notice effect, at the time of pseudo continuous effect, development During production, vibration production during cut-in production, etc.) can be executed, and the loss result during the specific game state is more likely than the case where the first variation production that results in the loss during the specific game state is executed. The vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the second variation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 14th-1 invention for solving the above problem is a game machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever) that can be operated by the player. 24), first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port); A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), a normal game state, and the normal game A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the state, and variation of the production pattern according to the determination result of the first determination means. Effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes a first variable effect with display and executes a second variable effect with variable display of effect symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means, The effect control means provides a vibration effect (at the time of anticipation vibration effect, at the time of dialogue notice effect, at the time of SU notice effect, at the time of pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the first variable effect or the second change effect. Vibration production of reach) can be executed, and the first fluctuation production is a first specific fluctuation production (reach fluctuation production) in which the second production (post-reach production) is executed after the first production (pre-reach production) ), wherein the second variable effect includes a second specific variable effect (reach variable effect) in which a second effect (post-reach effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect), and the specific The case where the second specific variation performance as a special result is executed during the specific game state is more favorable than the case where the first specific variation performance as a special result is executed during the game state. The vibration performance is easily executed during the performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the 14-2 invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Lever 24), first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port); 2 second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), the normal game state, and the normal A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the game state, and a production pattern according to the determination result of the first determination means. a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a first variable performance with variable display and executing a second variable performance with variable display of performance symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means. , the effect control means vibrates the operation means during the execution of the first variable effect or the second variable effect (at the time of anticipation vibration effect, at the time of dialogue notice effect, at the time of SU notice effect, at the time of pseudo continuous effect) etc.), and the second variable performance that becomes a special result during the specific game state is more likely than the case where the first variable performance that becomes a special result is executed during the specific game state. When it is executed, the number of times the vibration effect is executed tends to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The fifteenth invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein the satisfaction of the first start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first start port) ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, and according to the determination result of the first determination means, execute the first variable effect with variable display of the effect symbol, and according to the determination result of the second determination means and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a second variable production accompanied by a variable display of production patterns, and the production control means provides a special game production (jackpot game production) during execution of the special game. can be executed, and the first variable effect in the specific game state and the second variable effect in the specific game state have different aspects (presence or absence of reach effect, presence or absence of the icon, type of background image, BGM type etc.), but the special game production after the first variation production in the specific game state and the special game production after the second variation production in the specific game state are common It is possible to execute the production in the mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 16th invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, and according to the determination result of the first determination means, execute the first variable effect with variable display of the effect symbol, and according to the determination result of the second determination means and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a second variable production accompanied by a variable display of production patterns, and the production control means is selected from a plurality of production modes (production modes A to G). It is controllable, and the change in the performance mode is greater when the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable performance is executed during the normal game state. less likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 17th invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, and according to the determination result of the first determination means, execute the first variable effect with variable display of the effect symbol, and according to the determination result of the second determination means and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a second variable production accompanied by a variable display of production patterns, and the production control means is selected from a plurality of production modes (production modes A to G). It is controllable, and the change in the performance mode is greater when the second variable performance is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state. more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 18th invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, and according to the determination result of the first determination means, execute the first variable effect with variable display of the effect symbol, and according to the determination result of the second determination means and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a second variable production accompanied by a variable display of production patterns, wherein the production control means is during execution of the first variable production or the second variable production. When the stop suggesting effect (eye-catching effect, lighting effect effect, etc.) that suggests the stop display of the effect symbol can be executed, and the first variable effect as a special result is executed during the normal game state. Execution of the stop suggestion effect is more difficult when the first variable effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The nineteenth invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, and according to the determination result of the first determination means, execute the first variable effect with variable display of the effect symbol, and according to the determination result of the second determination means and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a second variable production accompanied by a variable display of production patterns, wherein the production control means is during execution of the first variable production or the second variable production. When a stop suggesting effect (eye-catching effect, light emitting effect effect, etc.) that suggests that the effect pattern is stopped and displayed can be executed, and the first variable effect as a special result is executed during the specific game state. The stop suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when the second variable effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 20th-1 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein First determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of the game), and based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute a special game, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ) and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, a first variation performance is executed according to the determination result of the first determination means, and a second variation performance is executed according to the determination result of the second determination means and a production control means (production control board 130) that executes a plurality of types of advance notice production ( Dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, roulette notice effect, cut-in effect, etc.) can be executed, and more than when the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state. When the first variable effect is executed during the normal game state, the number of types of the notice effect to be executed is larger. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
A 20-2 invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein satisfaction of the first start condition (playing the game to the first start port) Based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of the ball) and the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state), a first variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the first determination means, and a second variation is performed according to the determination result of the second determination means Effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing effects, the effect control means having a plurality of types of advance notice effects suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed during the execution of the first variable effect. (Dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, roulette notice effect, cut-in effect, etc.) can be executed, and more than when the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state , the number of kinds of the announcement effects to be executed is larger when the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 21st-1 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein First determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of the game), and based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute a special game, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ) and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, a first variation performance is executed according to the determination result of the first determination means, and a second variation performance is executed according to the determination result of the second determination means and the effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the above-mentioned effect control means is a notice effect (pre-reach notice Effect, notice effect after reach, etc.) can be executed, and the notice effect includes a first notice effect (prediction effect before reach) and a second notice effect (prediction effect after reach), and the specific game The number of executions of the first notice effect tends to be greater when the first variable effect is executed during the normal game state than when the first variable effect is executed during the state. there is Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the 21-2 invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein the satisfaction of the first start condition (the game to the first start port Based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of the ball) and the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state), a first variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the first determination means, and a second variation is performed according to the determination result of the second determination means and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a performance, wherein the performance control means suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed during the execution of the first variable performance or the second variable performance. It is possible to execute a notice effect (pre-reach notice effect, post-reach notice effect, etc.), and the notice effect includes a first notice effect (pre-reach notice effect) and a second notice effect (post-reach notice effect, etc.) , and the execution of the first notice effect is better when the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state. It is becoming easier to increase the number of times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The twenty-second invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which movable members (first movable member 73, second 2 movable member 74 etc.) and first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port) And, the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and the normal game state , State control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and according to the determination result of the first determination means Effect control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable effect and executes a second variable effect according to the determination result of the second determination means, and the effect control means is configured to perform the first variable effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (prefetching action effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, etc.) accompanied by the action of the movable member during execution of the effect, and the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state. Also, when the first variable effect is executed during the normal game state, the specific effect is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The twenty-third invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which movable members (first movable member 73, second 2 movable member 74 etc.) and first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port) And, the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and the normal game state , State control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and according to the determination result of the first determination means Effect control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable effect and executes a second variable effect according to the determination result of the second determination means, and the effect control means is configured to perform the first variable effect. During execution of the performance or the second variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (look-ahead motion performance, pseudo-continuous performance, development performance, etc.) involving the movement of the movable member, and the first variable performance during the specific game state. The specific effect is more likely to be executed when the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state than when is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The twenty-fourth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. a first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on; Second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, normal game state, and a state of controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state Control means (main control board 110), and effect control means for executing a first variable effect according to the determination result of the first determination means, and executing a second variable effect according to the determination result of the second determination means (Production control board 130), and the production control means can output a predetermined sound (first to fourth generated notification sounds, etc.) from the sound output unit based on the winning of the game medium to the first start area. The predetermined sound is produced more when the game medium enters the first starting area during the normal game state than when the game medium enters the first starting area during the specific game state. It is easy to output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The twenty-fifth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. a first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on; Second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, normal game state, and a state of controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state Control means (main control board 110), and effect control means for executing a first variable effect according to the determination result of the first determination means, and executing a second variable effect according to the determination result of the second determination means (Production control board 130), and the production control means outputs a predetermined sound (first to fourth generation notification Sound, etc.) can be output, and the case where the game medium wins in the second start area during the specific game state is better than the case where the game medium wins in the first start area during the specific game state. However, the predetermined sound is likely to be output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The twenty-sixth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. And, the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port), and the second starting condition A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (winning of the game ball to the second start port), a normal game state, and the normal game state State control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player, and variation of a plurality of performance symbols according to the determination result of the first determination means a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a first variable production accompanied by display and executing a second variable production accompanied by variable display of a plurality of production patterns in accordance with the determination result of the second determination means; The effect control means temporarily stops the plurality of effect symbols during execution of the first variable effect (chance eye, same color, appearance including pseudo symbol, etc.). effect, pseudo-continuous effect) can be executed, and the case where the first variable effect is executed during the normal game state is better than the case where the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state. , the specific effect is likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The twenty-seventh invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. And, the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port), and the second starting condition A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (winning of the game ball to the second start port), a normal game state, and the normal game state State control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player, and variation of a plurality of performance symbols according to the determination result of the first determination means a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a first variable production accompanied by display and executing a second variable production accompanied by variable display of a plurality of production patterns in accordance with the determination result of the second determination means; The performance control means temporarily stops the plurality of performance symbols in a specific combination (chance symbols, same color, random symbols including pseudo symbols, etc.) during execution of the first variable performance or the second variable performance. A specific performance (read-ahead chance performance, pseudo-continuous performance) can be executed, and the second variable performance is executed during the specific game state more than when the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state. It is easier for the specific effect to be executed in the case where it is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The twenty-eighth invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, and according to the determination result of the first determination means, execute the first variable effect with variable display of the effect symbol, and according to the determination result of the second determination means and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols, and the performance control means causes the performance symbols to correspond to the performance symbols during execution of the first variable performance. It is possible to execute a specific effect (look-ahead effect effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) for displaying a predetermined image (effect image), and the normal game is more likely than the case where the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state. It is easier to execute the specific effect when the first variable effect is executed during the state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The twenty-ninth invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, and according to the determination result of the first determination means, execute the first variable effect with variable display of the effect symbol, and according to the determination result of the second determination means and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a second variable production accompanied by a variable display of production patterns, wherein the production control means is during execution of the first variable production or the second variable production. When it is possible to execute a specific effect (look-ahead effect effect, pseudo continuous effect, etc.) for displaying a predetermined image (effect image) corresponding to the effect pattern, and the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state. It is easier to execute the specific effect when the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A thirtieth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. 2 movable member 74 etc.) and first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port) And, the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and the normal game state , State control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and according to the determination result of the first determination means Effect control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable effect and executes a second variable effect according to the determination result of the second determination means, and the effect control means is configured to perform the first variable effect. During the execution of the performance, it is possible to execute the motion performance of the movable member (look-ahead motion performance, pseudo-continuous performance, development performance decision performance, etc.), and the first variable performance that results in a loss during the normal game state is executed. It is more difficult to execute the action production when the first variable production, which results in a loss, is executed during the specific game state, rather than when the first variable production is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 31st-1 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. , second movable member 74, etc.) and first determination means (main control board 110), a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and a normal game A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the determination result of the first determination means Effect control means (performance control board 130) for executing a first variable effect in response to the determination result of the second determination means and executing a second variable effect in accordance with the determination result of the second determination means. It is possible to execute an action effect of the movable member (a look-ahead action effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) during execution of the first variable effect, and in the first variable effect, a second effect is performed after the first effect (pre-reach effect). Including a specific variation production (reach fluctuation production) in which production (production after reach) is executed, special during the specific game state than when the specific fluctuation production that is a special result is executed during the normal game state In the case where the resulting specific variation performance is executed, it is more difficult to execute the action performance during the first performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
The 31st-2 invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which a movable member (first movable member) capable of operating in a predetermined manner is provided. 73, second movable member 74, etc.) and first determination means (main control board 110), second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and the normal State control means (main control board 110) for controlling the game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the determination result of the first determination means and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a first variation production according to the determination result of the second determination means (production control board 130), wherein the production control means is the During the execution of the first variable performance, the motion performance of the movable member (look-ahead motion performance, pseudo-continuous performance, development performance, etc.) can be executed, and the first variable performance as a special result is executed during the normal game state. The number of executions of the action presentation tends to be smaller when the first variable presentation, which is a special result, is performed during the specific game state than when the first variation presentation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 32nd invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which movable members (first movable member 73, second 2 movable member 74 etc.) and first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port) And, the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and the normal game state , State control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and according to the determination result of the first determination means Effect control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable effect and executes a second variable effect according to the determination result of the second determination means, and the effect control means is configured to perform the first variable effect. During execution of the performance or the second variable performance, it is possible to execute the motion performance of the movable member (prediction motion performance, pseudo-continuous performance, development performance, final performance, etc.), and the result of losing during the specific game state. The operation performance is more likely to be executed when the second variable performance, which results in a loss, is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 33-1st invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. , second movable member 74, etc.) and first determination means (main control board 110), a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and a normal game A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the determination result of the first determination means Effect control means (performance control board 130) for executing a first variable effect in response to the determination result of the second determination means and executing a second variable effect in accordance with the determination result of the second determination means. During the execution of the first variable effect or the second variable effect, an action effect of the movable member (predictive action effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, final effect, etc.) can be executed, and the first variable effect includes a second Including a first specific variation production (reach fluctuation production) in which a second production (post-reach production) is executed after the first production (pre-reach production), the second fluctuation production includes the first production (pre-reach production) ) includes a second specific variable effect (ready-to-win effect) in which a second effect (post-ready effect) is executed, and the first specific variable effect to be a special result is executed during the specific game state. In the case where the second specific variable effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific game state, the action effect is more likely to be executed during the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
The 33rd-2 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, etc.) and first determination means (main control board 110 ), the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and the normal game state And, state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and according to the determination result of the first determination means a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a first variation production in accordance with the determination result of the second determination means (production control board 130); During the execution of the variable performance or the second variable performance, it is possible to execute the motion performance of the movable member (predictive motion performance, pseudo-continuous performance, development performance, final performance, etc.), and a special result is obtained during the specific game state. The number of executions of the action performance tends to increase when the second variable performance, which is a special result, is executed during the specific game state, rather than when the first variable performance is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The thirty-fourth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. And, the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port), and the second starting condition A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (winning of the game ball to the second start port), a normal game state, and the normal game state A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display of the production pattern according to the determination result of the first determination means. a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a first variable production accompanied by a first variable production and executing a second variable production accompanied by a variable display of production patterns according to the determination result of the second determination means, wherein the production The control means generates an effective period during the execution of the first variable effect, and provides an operation effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) can be executed, and the first variable effect is a specific variable effect in which the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect). Including (reach variation performance), when the specific variation performance is executed during the specific game state, the operation performance is more likely to be executed during the second performance than during the first performance. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The thirty-fifth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. And, the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port), and the second starting condition A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (winning of the game ball to the second start port), a normal game state, and the normal game state A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display of the production pattern according to the determination result of the first determination means. a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a first variable production accompanied by a first variable production and executing a second variable production accompanied by a variable display of production patterns according to the determination result of the second determination means, wherein the production The control means vibrates the operation means during the execution of the first variable effect (during anticipation vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect) Vibration production such as time) can be executed, and the first fluctuation production is a specific fluctuation production (reach fluctuation production) in which the second production (post-reach production) is executed after the first production (pre-reach production) ), and when the specific variation effect is executed during the specific game state, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the second effect than during the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The thirty-sixth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. 2 movable member 74 etc.) and first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port) And, the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and the normal game state , State control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and according to the determination result of the first determination means Effect control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable effect and executes a second variable effect according to the determination result of the second determination means, and the effect control means is configured to perform the first variable effect. It is possible to execute an action effect of the movable member (a look-ahead action effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a development effect, a final effect, etc.) during the execution of the effect, and the first variable effect is more suitable than the first effect (pre-reach effect). Including a specific variation effect (ready-to-win effect) in which a second effect (post-ready effect) is executed later, and when the specific variation effect is executed during the specific game state, the second effect is performed more than during the first effect. During the second performance, the action performance is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The thirty-seventh invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, and according to the determination result of the first determination means, execute the first variable effect with variable display of the effect symbol, and according to the determination result of the second determination means a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a second variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols, and the performance control means displays a plurality of options during execution of the first variable performance. At the same time, it is possible to execute a selection effect (roulette effect) for selecting an option according to the effect to be executed thereafter, and compared to the case where the first variable effect that results in a loss during the normal game state is executed. The selection effect is more difficult to execute when the first variable effect that results in a loss is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The thirty-eighth invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, and according to the determination result of the first determination means, execute the first variable effect with variable display of the effect symbol, and according to the determination result of the second determination means a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a second variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols, and the performance control means displays a plurality of options during execution of the first variable performance. At the same time, it is possible to execute a selection effect (roulette effect) for selecting an option according to the effect to be executed thereafter, and compared to the case where the first variable effect as a special result is executed during the normal game state, The selection effect is more difficult to execute when the first variable effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The thirty-ninth invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, and according to the determination result of the first determination means, execute the first variable effect with variable display of the effect symbol, and according to the determination result of the second determination means and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols, and the performance control means causes the display means to display during execution of the first variable performance. An update effect (timer effect, count-up effect, etc.) for updating predetermined information (numerical value, quantity) can be executed, and the first variable effect resulting in a loss is executed during the normal game state. Also, it is more difficult to execute the update effect when the first variable effect that results in a loss is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 40th invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, wherein the satisfaction of the first start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first start port) ) based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port) A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the above, and according to the determination result of the first determination means, execute the first variable effect with variable display of the effect symbol, and according to the determination result of the second determination means and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols, and the performance control means causes the display means to display during execution of the first variable performance. An update effect (timer effect, count-up effect, etc.) for updating predetermined information (numerical value, quantity) can be executed, and the first variable effect as a special result is executed during the normal game state. Also, it is more difficult to execute the update performance when the first variable performance as a special result is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to a low-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game when the type of the jackpot special pattern is the normal pattern, and when the jackpot special pattern type is the specific pattern. 1 shifts to a high-probability game state continuing until the next big-win game after the end of the big-win game, but it may be a game machine that shifts to the high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all the big-win games.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are completed, the high-probability game state is entered, and when the falling lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols in the high-probability game state is won, the high-probability game state is ended and the normal It may be a game machine that returns to the game state.

In addition, when a game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of a jackpot game, it may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it is also possible to adopt a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 game machine 5 game board 44 normal figure gate 45 first starting port 47 second starting port 50 big prize winning port 70 first image display device 71 second image display device 110 main control board 110a main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Effect control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a first determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition;
a second determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition;
a state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state;
Effect control means for executing a first variable effect according to the determination result of the first determination means, and executing a second variable effect according to the determination result of the second determination means,
The operating means are
including a first operating means and a second operating means different from the first operating means,
The production control means is
The effect element used for the variable effect can be changed to any one of a plurality of effect elements according to the operation of the first operation means,
It is possible to change the effect element used for the first variable effect during execution of the second variable effect in the specific game state,
capable of executing a first vibration effect in which the second operating means is vibrated in a predetermined manner without generating an effective period of the second operating means during execution of the first variable effect;
capable of executing a second vibration effect for vibrating the second operating means in a predetermined manner in accordance with the operation of the second operating means during the valid period occurring during the execution of the first variable effect,
capable of executing a win-lose effect suggesting whether or not the special game is to be executed during execution of the first variable effect;
The ease with which the first vibration effect is executed differs between when the first variable effect is executed during the normal game state and when the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state,
The valid period related to the second vibration effect is
Occurs when the win-lose effect is executed,
A game machine characterized in that the vibration period in the second vibration performance associated with the win-lose performance is longer than the vibration period in the first vibration performance.

Images